Lar g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r
User Manual
ENG
Contents
Contents
Introduction
1
How to use this manual.....................................................................................1
About This User Manual...............................................................................................................1
Searching Topics..........................................................................................................................3
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing......................................................................................5
Printer Parts
13
Printer parts.....................................................................................................13
Front...........................................................................................................................................13
Back...........................................................................................................................................15
Top Cover (Inside)......................................................................................................................16
Carriage......................................................................................................................................18
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)...............................................................................................................19
Wheeled Output Stacker............................................................................................................20
Control Panel..............................................................................................................................21
Control Panel...................................................................................................23
Control Panel..............................................................................................................................23
Turning the Printer On and Off...................................................................................................25
Printer Modes.............................................................................................................................27
Switching Modes........................................................................................................................32
Printer Menu Operations............................................................................................................34
Main Menu Operations...............................................................................................................36
Menu Structure...........................................................................................................................40
Main Menu Settings....................................................................................................................53
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)........................................................................................66
Submenu Display.......................................................................................................................67
Status Print.................................................................................................................................69
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations.......................................................................76
Optional accessories.......................................................................................78
Roll Holder Set...........................................................................................................................78
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board.....................................................................................78
Printer Specifications.......................................................................................79
Specifications.............................................................................................................................79
Basic Environmental Performance.............................................................................................84
Print Area....................................................................................................................................85
Contents �
Contents
Basic Printing Workflow
86
Printing procedure...........................................................................................86
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets...................................................................................86
Loading and Printing on Rolls....................................................................................................89
Loading and Printing on Sheets.................................................................................................93
Printing in Windows....................................................................................................................96
Printing in Mac OS X..................................................................................................................97
Canceling print jobs.........................................................................................99
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel.............................................................................99
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows.........................................................................................100
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X.......................................................................................102
Handling Paper
104
Paper.............................................................................................................104
Types of Paper.........................................................................................................................104
Paper Sizes..............................................................................................................................109
Handling rolls................................................................................................. 112
Selecting the Paper Source...................................................................................................... 112
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)................................................................................................ 113
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)........................................................................................... 114
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls............................................................................................. 115
Loading Rolls in the Printer...................................................................................................... 118
Removing the Roll from the Printer..........................................................................................125
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls.......................................................................................129
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................131
Feeding Roll Paper Manually...................................................................................................135
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left......................................................................136
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls...................................................................................137
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls...................................................................................139
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically.............................................................143
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls............................................................................................144
Roll Holder Set.........................................................................................................................145
Automatic Roll Switching..........................................................................................................146
Handling sheets for paper feed slots.............................................................148
Selecting the Paper Source......................................................................................................148
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................149
Loading Sheets in the Printer...................................................................................................150
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing................................................................153
Removing Sheets.....................................................................................................................155
Clearing a Jammed Sheet........................................................................................................156
Output Stacker...............................................................................................158
Wheeled Output Stacker..........................................................................................................158
Using the Wheeled Output Stacker..........................................................................................159
ii Contents
Contents
Working With Various Print Jobs
161
Printing Photos and Images...........................................................................161
Printing Photos and Images.....................................................................................................161
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)...................................................................................163
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................165
Printing Photos in Monochrome...............................................................................................168
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Windows).....................................169
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Mac OS X)...................................171
Printing CAD Drawings..................................................................................174
Printing CAD Drawings.............................................................................................................174
Printing Line Drawings and Text...............................................................................................174
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows).............................................................................176
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)...........................................................................178
Printing CAD Drawings in Monochrome...................................................................................181
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Line Drawings (Windows).........................182
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Line Drawings (Mac OS X).......................184
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings.........................................................................187
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows).......................................................188
HP-GL/2 Printing......................................................................................................................190
Printing Office Documents.............................................................................191
Printing Office Documents........................................................................................................191
Printing Office Documents (Windows)......................................................................................192
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)....................................................................................194
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER.............................................196
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER.............................196
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........196
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X).........199
Enhanced Printing Options
201
Adjusting Images...........................................................................................201
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver...................................................................................201
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows).............................................................205
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)...........................................................208
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing.................................... 211
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)..........................................215
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X)........................................217
Choosing Paper for Printing...........................................................................220
Choosing a Paper for Printing..................................................................................................220
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)................................................................................................221
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................222
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver......................................................................................223
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)....................................................................224
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)..................................................................226
Contents iii
Contents
Printing enlargements or reductions..............................................................228
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.............................................................................228
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)...........................................................229
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).........................................................231
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width....................................................................................234
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..................................................................235
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)................................................................237
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......................................................................240
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows).....................................................241
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)....................................................243
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER.............................246
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........247
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X).........249
Printing at full size..........................................................................................251
Printing on Oversized Paper....................................................................................................251
Printing at Full Size (Windows)................................................................................................253
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)...............................................................................................255
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................258
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................260
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................262
Borderless Printing........................................................................................265
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size......................................................................265
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows).......................267
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................269
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width................................................272
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..............................274
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................276
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................279
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................281
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................283
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes............................................286
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)..............................................286
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)..............................288
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)............................293
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes....................................................................................297
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)..................................................................298
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X).................................................................302
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet...............................................................304
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.........................................................................304
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows).......................................................306
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X).....................................................308
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously.......................................................................................310
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)..................................................................... 311
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)...................................................................313
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet............................................................................................315
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................316
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)........................................................................318
Printing Posters in Sections.....................................................................................................321
iv Contents
Contents
Printing Large Posters (Windows)............................................................................................322
Centering originals.........................................................................................324
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls........................................................................................324
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)......................................................................325
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)....................................................................327
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets.....................................................................................330
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)...................................................................331
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X).................................................................333
Conserving roll paper.....................................................................................335
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees.......................................................335
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows).....................................336
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)....................................338
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins.......................341
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).....342
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)...344
Checking Images Before Printing..................................................................347
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing...................................................................347
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows).................................................349
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)...............................................352
Other useful settings......................................................................................353
Printing With Watermarks.........................................................................................................353
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)......................................354
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation..................................................356
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)................................357
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)..............................359
Using Favorites........................................................................................................................362
Using Favorites (Windows)......................................................................................................363
Using Favorites (Mac OS X).....................................................................................................365
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing...............................................................................................366
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows).............................................................................367
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)...........................................................................368
Windows Software
370
Printer Driver..................................................................................................370
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)............................................................................................370
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)....................................................................372
Confirming Print Settings (Windows)........................................................................................374
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows).................................................376
Using Favorites (Windows)......................................................................................................379
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)....................................381
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)..........383
Main Sheet (Windows).............................................................................................................385
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)................................................................388
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................389
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows)............................................390
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)...............................................................................391
Matching Sheet (Windows)......................................................................................................393
Contents Contents
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)...................................................................395
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)..................................................................................................397
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)..............................................................................399
Layout Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................................................400
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................................402
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)...................................................................................403
Favorites Sheet (Windows)......................................................................................................404
Utility Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................................406
Support Sheet (Windows)........................................................................................................407
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................408
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows).............................................................................409
Status Monitor................................................................................................410
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)............................................................................410
Digital Photo Front-Access............................................................................ 411
Digital Photo Front-Access....................................................................................................... 411
PosterArtist....................................................................................................412
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals.................................................................................412
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)...............................................................413
Device Setup Utility........................................................................................415
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................................415
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................416
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................417
Mac OS X Software
418
Printer Driver..................................................................................................418
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)..........................................................................................418
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)..................................................................419
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)......................................................................................421
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)...............................................423
Using Favorites (Mac OS X).....................................................................................................424
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X)..................................425
Main Pane (Mac OS X)............................................................................................................426
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)..............................................................429
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X).....................................................................430
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X)...........................................431
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)...................................................................................432
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X).......................................................................434
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X).................................................................................................435
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................................................................................437
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)......................................................................................438
Support Pane (Mac OS X)........................................................................................................439
Printmonitor...................................................................................................440
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)..............................................................................440
vi Contents
Contents
Network Setting
441
Network Setting.............................................................................................441
Network Environment...............................................................................................................441
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer................................................................................443
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................444
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel....................................................445
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands................................................446
Using RemoteUI.......................................................................................................................447
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings..................................................................448
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings..............................................................450
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings................................................................451
Specifying Printer-Related Information.....................................................................................453
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur..................................................454
Initializing the Network Settings...............................................................................................455
Network Setting (Windows)...........................................................................456
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)..............................................................456
Sharing the Printer in Windows................................................................................................457
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings................................................................459
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type.........................................................................................461
Specifying NetWare Print Services...........................................................................................463
Specifying NetWare Protocols..................................................................................................466
Configuring NetWare Network Settings....................................................................................468
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................469
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................470
Network Setting (Mac OS X)..........................................................................471
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)............................................................471
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings..............................................................472
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh).............................................473
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)..................................................476
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh).................................................479
Hard Disk
480
Hard Disk.......................................................................................................480
Printer Hard Disk Operations...................................................................................................480
Saved Print Jobs......................................................................................................................482
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the Printer Driver........................................484
Saving Print Jobs.....................................................................................................................485
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box...........................................................................489
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)................................................490
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes....................................................................................493
Naming Personal Boxes...........................................................................................................498
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs...............................................................................................503
Printing a List of Saved Jobs....................................................................................................508
Printing Saved Jobs.................................................................................................................509
Moving Saved Jobs..................................................................................................................516
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs.............................................................................................522
Renaming Saved Jobs.............................................................................................................527
Contents vii
Contents
Deleting Saved Jobs................................................................................................................534
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space........................................................................................539
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk...................................................................................542
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
543
Adjusting the Printhead..................................................................................543
Adjusting the Printhead............................................................................................................543
Automatic Straightening of Lines and Colors (Auto Head Adj.)................................................544
Manual Straightening of Lines and Colors (Manual Head Adj).................................................546
Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)...........................................................................548
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images (Head Height).........................................551
Adjusting the feed amount.............................................................................552
Adjusting the Feed Amount......................................................................................................552
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed Priority)..................................................553
Auto Band Adjustment (Auto Band Adj.)...................................................................................554
Manual Band Adjustment (Manual Band Adj)...........................................................................556
Banding Adjustment During Printing (Fine Band Adj.)..............................................................558
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length).....................................................................................559
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth)....................................................................561
Maintenance
562
Ink Tanks........................................................................................................562
Ink Tanks..................................................................................................................................562
Replacing Ink Tanks.................................................................................................................563
Checking Ink Tank Levels.........................................................................................................574
When to Replace Ink Tanks......................................................................................................575
Printheads......................................................................................................576
Printhead..................................................................................................................................576
Checking for Nozzle Clogging..................................................................................................577
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................578
Replacing the Printhead...........................................................................................................579
Maintenance Cartridge..................................................................................585
Maintenance Cartridge.............................................................................................................585
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge......................................................................................586
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity......................................................594
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge..........................................................................595
Cleaning the Printer.......................................................................................596
Cleaning the Printer Exterior....................................................................................................596
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.................................................................................................597
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................600
Other Maintenance........................................................................................601
Preparing to Transfer the Printer..............................................................................................601
Updating the Firmware.............................................................................................................606
viii Contents
Contents
Troubleshooting
607
Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................................607
Frequently Asked Questions....................................................................................................607
Problems Regarding Paper...........................................................................610
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................610
Clearing a Jammed Sheet........................................................................................................613
Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found..................................................................615
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed Slot.........................................................618
Cannot Load Sheets.................................................................................................................618
Paper is not cut straight............................................................................................................618
Paper is not cut........................................................................................................................618
Printing does not start....................................................................................619
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up.............................................................619
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent..........................................................619
The display screen indicates the system is filling with ink........................................................619
The printer stops during a print job................................................................620
An error message is shown on the Display Screen..................................................................620
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper.................................................................................620
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)............................620
Problems with the printing quality..................................................................621
Printing is faint..........................................................................................................................621
Paper rubs against the printhead.............................................................................................622
The edges of the paper are dirty..............................................................................................623
The surface of the paper is dirty...............................................................................................624
The back side of the paper is dirty...........................................................................................624
Printed colors are inaccurate....................................................................................................625
Banding in different colors occurs............................................................................................626
Colors in printed images are uneven........................................................................................627
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs................................................................628
Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen......................................................................................629
The contrast becomes uneven during printing.........................................................................631
The length of printed images is inaccurate...............................................................................631
Documents are printed crooked...............................................................................................631
Documents are printed in monochrome...................................................................................632
Line thickness is not uniform....................................................................................................632
Lines are misaligned................................................................................................................633
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper...............................................633
Cannot print over a network...........................................................................634
Cannot connect the printer to the network...............................................................................634
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually......................................................................635
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network.........................................................................................636
Cannot print over a NetWare network......................................................................................636
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks....................................................................637
Contents ix
Contents
Installation problems......................................................................................638
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly...............................................................638
Removing Installed Printer Drivers...........................................................................................639
HP-GL/2 problems.........................................................................................640
Lines or images are missing in the HP-GL/2 data that was printed.........................................640
Lines Are Printed Too Thick or Thin During HP-GL/2 Printing..................................................640
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)................................................................640
Printed Colors in Line Drawings are Inaccurate During HP-GL/2 Printing...............................640
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time..........................................................................................640
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)............................641
Other problems..............................................................................................642
The printer does not go on.......................................................................................................642
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound......................................................................................643
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared.................................644
The printer consumes a lot of ink.............................................................................................644
Ink level detection.....................................................................................................................645
Error Message
647
Responding to Messages..............................................................................647
Responding to Messages.........................................................................................................647
Error Messages........................................................................................................................648
Messages regarding paper............................................................................650
Papr Type Mismatch.................................................................................................................650
PaprTypeMismatch...................................................................................................................650
The paper is too small..............................................................................................................651
RollWdthMismatch...................................................................................................................651
Paper size not detected............................................................................................................652
Insufficient paper for job...........................................................................................................653
This paper cannot be used.......................................................................................................653
Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use........................................................................653
Roll printing is selected............................................................................................................654
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded........................................................................654
Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))............................................................................655
No Roll Unit..............................................................................................................................656
Sheet removed.........................................................................................................................656
Sheet printing is selected.........................................................................................................656
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.......................................................................656
Paper jam.................................................................................................................................657
Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))....................................................................................657
Paper loaded askew.................................................................................................................658
Paper cutting failed. . ...............................................................................................................659
End of paper feed.....................................................................................................................659
Rel lever is in wrong position....................................................................................................659
Borderless printng not possible................................................................................................660
Roll feed unit error....................................................................................................................660
The roll feed unit is loose. .......................................................................................................661
Contents
Contents
Messages regarding ink.................................................................................662
Ink insufficient...........................................................................................................................662
No ink left.................................................................................................................................662
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected..........................................................662
Close Ink Tank Cover...............................................................................................................662
Ink tank is empty.......................................................................................................................663
Not much ink is left...................................................................................................................663
No ink tank loaded....................................................................................................................663
Wrong ink tank..........................................................................................................................663
The display screen indicates Agitating.....................................................................................664
Messages regarding printing or adjusment....................................................665
Use another paper....................................................................................................................665
Cannot print as specified..........................................................................................................665
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................666
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................666
Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank.....................................................667
Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch..........................................................667
Blue platen switch is dirty. .......................................................................................................667
Messages regarding printheads....................................................................668
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................668
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................668
PHead needs cleaning.............................................................................................................669
Wrong printhead.......................................................................................................................669
Problem with Printhead............................................................................................................669
Printhead error.........................................................................................................................669
No printhead.............................................................................................................................669
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge............................................670
Insert the maintenance cartridge..............................................................................................670
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ................................................................................................670
Prepare for maint cart replacement..........................................................................................670
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................................................................................670
Maintenance cartridge full........................................................................................................670
Maintenance cartridge problem................................................................................................670
Messages regarding the hard disk.................................................................671
Hard disk error..........................................................................................................................671
File read error...........................................................................................................................671
The mail box is full. . ................................................................................................................671
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.........................................................................671
Mail box nearly full....................................................................................................................671
Maximum jobs stored...............................................................................................................672
Too many jobs for mail box.......................................................................................................672
Messages regarding HP-GL/2.......................................................................673
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. ................................................................673
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904)...............................................673
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.............................................................................673
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported..........................................................................673
Contents xi
Contents
Other Messages............................................................................................674
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)....................................................................................674
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)...............................................................674
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)............................................674
Top cover is open.....................................................................................................................674
Prepare for parts replacement..................................................................................................675
Parts replacement time has passed.........................................................................................675
Unknown file.............................................................................................................................675
Multi-sensor error.....................................................................................................................675
No Roll Unit..............................................................................................................................675
xii Contents
How to use this manual
Introduction
How to use this manual
About This User Manual
• Symbols
The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations
on restrictions or precautions in use.
Important
Indicates important information that must be followed when using the printer.
Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or operating errors.
Caution
Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or
damage to equipment or property. To ensure safe use, always follow these
precautions.
Note
Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on
particular topics.
• Button names and user interface elements
Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and
buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Control panel buttons
Example: Press the OK button.
Control panel messages
Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.
Software interface items
(Menus and Buttons)
Example: Click OK.
Keyboard keys
Example: Press the Tab key.
• Part names
Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Printer part names
Example: Open the Top Cover.
Introduction 1
How to use this manual
• Cross-reference
Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Cross-reference in the same User Manual
Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.
(→P.25)
Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.
Cross-reference in related manuals
Example: See the Paper Reference Guide .
Other cross-reference
Example: See the printer driver help.
• Figures and software screens
• Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some
cases.
• Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from
the actual screens because of subsequent updates.
• Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.
• Trademarks
• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon
Inc.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
• Copyright
© 2008 Canon Inc.
• Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.
• May we request
Thank you for understanding the following points.
• The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.
• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or
omissions, please contact us.
2 Introduction
How to use this manual
Searching Topics
You can nd information in topics of this User Manual by searching for relevant terms.
1.
Enter a term and click the Search button.
Note
• To search for multiple terms at once, enter a space between each term.
Search results are listed at left.
Introduction 3
How to use this manual
2.
Click a topic you want to read.
The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic.
To review multiple topics at once, select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply
button.
4 Introduction
How to use this manual
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing
You can select a group of topics in the table of contents or individual topics in this manual for printing.
The following procedure describes how to do this, using the information in Basic Printing Workow as an
example.
Printing a group of topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents, you
can specify a group of topics to print.
1.
Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an
example.
Introduction 5
How to use this manual
2.
Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
The topics in Basic Printing Workow are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
6 Introduction
How to use this manual
3.
Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button.
Printing a group of individual topics in the manual
When you access printable HTML versions from subtitles in the table of contents, you can specify a group
of topics to print.
1.
Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Workow is used as an
example.
Introduction 7
How to use this manual
2.
Under Basic Printing Workow, click Printing Procedure.
3.
Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.
8 Introduction
How to use this manual
The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.
4.
Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button.
Introduction 9
How to use this manual
Printing selected topics
Print selected topics as follows.
1.
Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.
• Windows
In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link.In the shortcut
menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.
10 Introduction
How to use this manual
• Macintosh
On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while
holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.
Introduction 11
How to use this manual
2.
Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).
• Windows
• Macintosh
Note
• To print only individual topics that are displayed, use this method.
12 Introduction
Printer parts
Printer Parts
Printer parts
Front
a. Top Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the
printer as needed. (→P.16)
b. Ejection Guide
Guides printed documents as they are ejected. Open this guide when loading a roll.
c. Roll Holder Slot
Slide the Roll Holder into this slot.
d. Roll Holder
Load the roll on this holder.
e. Protective Cloth for Sheets
A cloth tray that catches ejected sheets.
f. Paper Feed Slot
When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll paper here. You can load rolls in two positions, on the
printer side in the Roll 1 (Upper) position and on the roll unit side in the Roll 2 (Lower) position.
g. Holder Stopper
Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.
h. Ink Tank Cover
Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (→P.19)
i. Control Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.21)
Printer Parts 13
Printer parts
j. Release Lever
Releases the Paper Retainer. Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper.
k. Maintenance Cartridge
Ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning is absorbed. (Replace the cartridge
when it is full.)
l. Carrying Handles
When carrying the printer, have six people hold it by these handles under both sides.
m.Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
n. Stand
A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.
o. Stand L
The left leg of the Stand.
p. Stand R
The right leg of the Stand.
q. Leg Covers
Covers for Stand L and Stand R.
r. Stopper
Locks the Stand casters.
Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked
may scratch the casters or the oor.
s. Roll Unit
A unit for loading two rolls.
t. Roll Unit Lever
Hold this lever to pull out the Roll Unit.
14 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Back
a. Carrying Handles
When carrying the printer, have six people hold it by these handles under both sides.
b. Expansion Board Slots
Install an optional IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board, as desired.
c. Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly
and communication is possible between the computer and printer.
d. USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.
e. Manual Pocket
Store printer manuals in this pocket.
f. Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
g. Accessory Pocket
Store assembly tools, Roll Holder attachments, and other items in this pocket.
h. Roll Unit Power Supply Inlet
Connect the Roll Unit power cord to this inlet.
Printer Parts 15
Printer parts
Top Cover (Inside)
a. Top Cover Roller
Prevents paper from rising when ejected.
b. Paper Alignment Line
Align paper with this line when loading it.
c. Carriage
Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (→P.18)
d. Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
e. Paper Retainer
Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
f. Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen to print. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.
g. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
h. Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on
the Platen.
Also use the brush to move the blue Switch on the Platen.
16 Printer Parts
Printer parts
i. Cutter Rail
The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper.
j. Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting.
k. Linear Scale
The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this
part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.
l. Switch
Set the switch to the side opposite ● if the edges of printed images are blurred. Set the switch to
the ● side before borderless printing. (→P.629)
Printer Parts 17
Printer parts
Carriage
a. Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place.
b. Printhead
The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. The carriage serves a key role in printing.
c. Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.
d. Shaft Cleaner
Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty.
e. Angle Adjustment Lever
Use this lever to ne-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.
18 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
Note: The gure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank.
a. Ink Tanks
Cartridges of ink in various colors.
b. Ink Tank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and lower the lever when replacing an Ink
Tank. To open it, lift the stopper of the lever until it stops, and then push it down toward the front. To
close it, push it down until it clicks into place.
c. Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.
• On
The Ink Tank is installed correctly.
• Off
No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.
• Flashing Slowly
Not much ink is left.
• Flashing Rapidly
Ink tank is empty.
d. Ink Color Label
Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.
e. Ink Set
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the
side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “A” is printed on the label. (→P.562)
Printer Parts 19
Printer parts
Wheeled Output Stacker
An output stacker with casters, positioned in front of the printer.
a. Output Stacker
A cloth tray that catches ejected documents.
The Output Stacker can be opened and closed using the rod in front.
b. Output Stacker Ejection Guides
Prevent printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or being drawn into the Paper
Feed Slot.
Hold the Wheeled Output Stacker by these guides when moving it.
c. Output Stacker Foot Stand
Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.
d. Stopper
Locks the Stand casters.
Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked
may scratch the casters or the oor.
Note
• For instructions on assembling the Wheeled Output Stacker, see the setup guide provided with the
Wheeled Output Stacker.
20 Printer Parts
Printer parts
Control Panel
a. Online Button (Green)
Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.32)
• On
The printer is online.
• Flashing
The printer is switching modes.
• Off
The printer is ofine.
b. Menu Button
Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.53)
c. Data lamp (Green)
• Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.
• Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
d. Message lamp (Orange)
• On
A warning message is displayed.
• Flashing
An error message is displayed.
• Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
e. Paper Source Section
After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.
1. Roll Media lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
2. Cut Sheet lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
Printer Parts 21
Printer parts
f. Feeder Selection Button
Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the
roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.
g. Display Screen
Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.
h. Color Label
This label indicates the Ink Tank color. The label corresponds to the ink level on the Display Screen.
i. HDD lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates the printer is accessing the hard disk.
• Off
Indicates the printer is not accessing the hard disk.
j. ◄ Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.
k. ▲ Button
Ofine: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.135)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.
l. ▼ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.
(→P.135)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.
m.► Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.
n. OK Button
In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Also press this
button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
o. Information Button
Displays printer submenus. Press this button to display information about ink, paper, and so on.
(→P.67)
You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).
p. Power Button
Turns the printer on and off. (→P.25)
q. Load/Eject Button
By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for
loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions
for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.
r. Stop Button
Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.
Note
• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.
22 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel
a. Online Button (Green)
Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.32)
• On
The printer is online.
• Flashing
The printer is switching modes.
• Off
The printer is ofine.
b. Menu Button
Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.53)
c. Data lamp (Green)
• Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.
• Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
d. Message lamp (Orange)
• On
A warning message is displayed.
• Flashing
An error message is displayed.
• Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
e. Paper Source Section
After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.
1. Roll Media lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
2. Cut Sheet lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
Printer Parts 23
Control Panel
f. Feeder Selection Button
Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the
roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.
g. Display Screen
Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.
h. Color Label
This label indicates the Ink Tank color. The label corresponds to the ink level on the Display Screen.
i. HDD lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates the printer is accessing the hard disk.
• Off
Indicates the printer is not accessing the hard disk.
j. ◄ Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.
k. ▲ Button
Ofine: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.135)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.
l. ▼ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.
(→P.135)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.
m.► Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.
n. OK Button
In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Also press this
button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
o. Information Button
Displays printer submenus. Press this button to display information about ink, paper, and so on.
(→P.67)
You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).
p. Power Button
Turns the printer on and off. (→P.25)
q. Load/Eject Button
By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for
loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions
for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.
r. Stop Button
Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.
Note
• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.
24 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning the printer on
1.
Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
The printer will now start up.
After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.
2.
The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper
source section lamp remain lit.
The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.
• The Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover.
• The Ink Tank Cover is open
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
• The Printhead is not installed
Please see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.579)
• Ink Tank is not installed
Please see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.563)
• “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen
Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.
• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display
Screen
Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.
• No paper is loaded
Load paper. (→P.89) (→P.93)
Important
• Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may
cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before
starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.
Printer Parts 25
Control Panel
Turning the printer off
Important
• Never disconnect the printer’s power supply or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as
necessary. (→P.648)
If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after
printing is nished.
2.
Hold down the Power button for more than a second.
After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.
26 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Printer Modes
Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modes (→P.27)
Mode transition (→P.28)
Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.29)
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.29)
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.30)
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.31)
Modes
The printer has ve modes as follows:
• Online
The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed
immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.
• Ofine
Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.
While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.
The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.
• Menu mode
Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent
from the computer are held without being printed.
• Submenu mode
Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is
possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the
computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.
• Sleep mode
The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if
it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or
buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.53)
If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the
printer goes online and prints the jobs.
Printer Parts 27
Control Panel
Mode transition
The printer mode transitions are as follows:
*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return
to the previous mode.
*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve
minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.
*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is
also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.
28 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Online, and state of the Control Panel
Not printing
Printing in progress (receiving or
processing print jobs)
Display Screen
• Top Line of the Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon to the left of
the type of paper.
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take the appropriate action. (→P.648)
• Bottom Line of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.574)
Control Panel
• Online lamp
Lit when the printer is online.
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel
Ofine
Not printing
Printing is paused
Display Screen
• Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon to the left of
the type of paper.
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take the appropriate action. (→P.648)
• Bottom Line of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.574)
Control Panel
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Printer Parts 29
Control Panel
Error Messages
If action can be taken
If no action can be taken
• Top Line of the Display • Top Line of the Display • Top Line of the Display • Display Screen
Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Line of the
Display Screen
Here, the remaining
ink level is indicated.
(→P.574)
Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Line of the
Display Screen
The corrective actions
are displayed here.
Screen
The error message
is displayed with the
following instructions:
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again..
“ERROR” is displayed,
followed by the error
code and Call for
service..
• Data lamp
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Take the appropriate action. (→P.648)
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is still displayed after this, write down
the error code and message, turn off the printer, and
contact the Canon dealer for assistance.
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Main menu
• Display Screen
Pressing the Menu button
when printing is not in progress
displays the main menu.
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menus immediately under
the current menu are displayed
on the second and subsequent
lines. Lower level menus are
available if “►” is displayed at
right. (→P.36)
30 Printer Parts
Menu items and settings
• Display Screen
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menu items or settings are
displayed on the second and
subsequent lines. (→P.36)
The menu of options available
during printing (top gure) can
be displayed by pressing the ►
button when the main menu is
displayed (left gure).
Main menu (during printing)
• Display Screen
Menus available during printing
are displayed if you press the
Menu button during printing.
If you select a menu, the title of
the selected menu is displayed
on the rst line, and menus
immediately under the current
menu are displayed on the
second and subsequent lines.
Lower level menus are available
if “►” is displayed at right.
(→P.36)
Control Panel
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Remaining Maintenance
Cartridge capacity
and ink levels
Information on the
loaded paper
Printer information
HP-GL/2 setting
information
Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, printer information, and GL2 settings information.
(→P.67)
Printer Parts 31
Control Panel
Switching Modes
Switching the Printer Online/Ofine
Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.
The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.
The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.
Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.
Printer Status
When Online is Pressed
Online
The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes
off.
Online, printing
Switches ofine and printing is paused.
When printing is paused, the Printing menu is
available.
Ofine
If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online
and the Online lamp is lit.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
In the case of error messages other than those
shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer
remains ofine until you solve the problem. The
Online lamp remains off.
If the following error messages are displayed, the
printer goes online and printing is resumed.
• Insufcient paper for job
• PHead needs cleaning.
• Papr Size Mismatch
• Papr Type Mismatch
Menu mode
If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online
and the Online lamp is lit.
Menu mode, printing
Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.
Print is resumed.
32 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Switching to Menu Mode
Press the Menu button to display the main menu.
Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.
When Menu is Pressed
Printer Status
Online
Switches to Menu mode.
Online, printing
Either menus available during printing or a screen to
manage print jobs is displayed. If you select a menu,
the printer switches to that menu mode.
Ofine
Switches to Menu mode.
Ofine, printing
Menus available during printing are displayed.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
You cannot access Menu mode until the problem is
solved.
Press the Information button to display the submenus.
Press the Information button to display the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, as well
as information on the loaded paper and the printer. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the
information displayed. (→P.67)
Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Note
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
(→P.578)
Printer Parts 33
Control Panel
Printer Menu Operations
The printer menu includes a main menu and submenus.
• Main menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P.34)
• Main menu operations during printing (→P.34)
• Submenu operations (→P.35)
Main menu operations when no print job is in progress
Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel.
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
Paper settings
Print settings
Printer settings
HP-GL/2 settings
Job management menu operations
For a description of specic items available in the main menu, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.53)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.36)
Note
• By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the
printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.
Main menu operations during printing
The Menu Durng Prtng and Job Mgmt Menu can be accessed from the Menu Selection screen by pressing
the Menu button on the control panel during printing. Other menus are available after printing is nished.
Note
• The Menu Selection screen will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu
button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu during printing.
Menu Durng Prtng
• Printhead cleaning
• Manual adjustment of the paper feed amount
• Display of printer-related information
Job Mgmt Menu
• Job management menu operations
For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings
(During Printing)”. (→P.66)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items during printing, see “Main Menu Operations”.
(→P.36)
34 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Submenu operations
Access submenus by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following
information in submenus.
•
•
•
•
•
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity
Ink levels
Information on the loaded paper
Printer information
HP-GL/2 setting information
For a description of specic items displayed in submenus, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.67)
Printer Parts 35
Control Panel
Main Menu Operations
Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.53)
• Main menu (displayed if you press the Menu button when printing is not in progress)
• Menu selection (if you press the Menu button when printing is in progress)
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.
• When an error message is displayed
You can switch to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access various function menus from the main menu and set
or execute menu items.
The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.
•
•
•
•
Accessing menus (→P.37)
Specifying menu items (→P.38)
Specifying numerical values (→P.39)
Executing menu commands (→P.39)
36 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Accessing menus
Printer menus are grouped by function.
Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.
• Press ▲ to access a higher level menu on the same screen, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If
not all menus can be displayed on the screen at once, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. Items you
select are highlighted.
The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.
• Lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. To access these lower level menus, select
a menu and press ►.
• Upper level menus are available if “◄” is displayed at left in the top line. To access these upper level
menus, press ◄.
Printer Parts 37
Control Panel
Specifying menu items
Follow these steps to specify menu items.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a setting item to complete, and then press the OK button.
The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.
After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.
3.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
38 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Specifying numerical values
Follow these steps to enter numbers. In this example, network settings items are entered.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to enter the number, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
Note
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address
in your network.
7.
8.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to continue entering numbers.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
Executing menu commands
Follow these steps to execute menu commands.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a setting item to execute, and then press the OK button.
After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, in most
cases the printer reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.
Printer Parts 39
Control Panel
Menu Structure
Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.36)
For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.53)
First Level
Paper Cutting
(*1)
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
No *
Yes
Rep. Ink Tank
No *
Yes
Head Cleaning
Head Cleaning
A*
Head Cleaning
B
Paper Menu
Cut Sheet Type
(The paper type
is displayed
here.) (*5)
Roll1(Uppr)
Type (*1)
(The paper type
is displayed
here.) (*5)
Roll1(Uppr)
Lngth (*1, *2)
### m
### feet (*11)
Roll2 (Lwr) Type (The paper type
(*1)
is displayed
here.) (*5)
Roll2(Lwr)
Lngth (*1, *2)
### m (*11)
### feet
ManageRemain Off *
Roll
On
Paper Details
(The paper type
is displayed
here.) (*5)
Roll
DryingTime
Off
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
40 Printer Parts
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
60 min.
Scan Wait Time Off
1 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
7 sec.
9 sec.
Feed Priority
Automatic *
Band Joint
Print Length
Adjust Length
A
From -0.70% to
0.70%
Adjust Length
B
From -0.70% to
0.70%
Head Height
Automatic *
Highest
High
Standard
Low
Lowest
Skew Check
Lv.
Standard *
Loose
Off
VacuumStrngth Automatic *
Strongest
Strong
Standard
Weak
Weakest
Width
Detection
Off
On *
NearEnd
RollMrgn
3mm
20mm
Cut Speed
Fast
Printer Parts 41
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Standard
Slow
Trim Edge First Automatic
Off
On
Cutting Mode
Automatic
Eject
Manual
Bordless
Margin
Automatic
Fixed
CutDustReduct. Off
On
NearEnd Sht
Mrgn
3mm
20mm
Return
Defaults
No
Yes
Job
Management
Print Job
Job List
(Choose a print
job.)
Delete
Preempt Jobs
Stored Job
Mailbox List
(Enter a
password if one
has been set.)
Job List
Print
Delete
Print Job List
No
Yes
Job Log
(Choose from
Document
information
Name
about the latest
three print jobs.)
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
OK
CANCELED
Print Start Time yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
42 Printer Parts
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Print End Time
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Print Time
xxxsec.
Print Size
xxxxxxxxsq.mm
Sixth Level
Media Type
Interface
USB
Network
IEEE1394
Ink Consumed
GL2 Settings
HDD
Information
HDDSpace
:xx.x GB
Color Mode
Monochrome
xx.x ml
Color (CAD) 1 *
Color (CAD) 2
Color (CAD) 3
Color (CAD) 4
Color (CAD) 5
Color (CAD) 6
Print Quality
Fast
Standard *
High
Print
(Economy)
Off *
On
Input
Resolution
600dpi *
300dpi
Paper Source
Automatic *
Roll 1 (Upper)
Roll 2 (Lower)
Cut Sheet
Conserve Paper Off *
On
Line Cap
Software *
Rounded
Smoothing
Software *
Smooth
Printer Parts 43
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Line Width
Third Level
Fourth Level
1 dot
2 dots
3 dots
4 dots *
5 dots
6 dots
7 dots
ThickenFine
Lines
Off *
On
AdjustFaint
Lines
Off
On *
Auto Rotate
Off
On *
Nesting
Use Nesting
Off *
On
Nesting
WaitTime
1-99 minutes
Cut Lines
Off *
On
On-the-Fly
Off *
On
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj. No
Yes
Auto Print
Off
On *
Manual Head
Adj (*9)
No
Yes
Auto Band Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj. No
Yes
44 Printer Parts
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Manual Band
Adj
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
No
Yes
Adjust Length
(*3)
A:High
No
Yes
B:Standard /
Draft
No
Yes
Head Inc. Adj.
No
Yes
Interface Setup
EOP Timer
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
5 min.
10 min. *
30 min.
60 min.
TCP/IP
IP Mode
Automatic
Manual *
Protocol (*4)
DHCP
On
Off *
BOOTP
On
Off *
RARP
On
Off *
IP Setting (*10) IP Address
NetWare
NetWare
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Default G/W
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
On
Off *
Frame Type
(*6)
Auto Detect
Ethernet 2
Printer Parts 45
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Ethernet 802.2
*
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
Print Service
(*6)
BinderyPServer
RPrinter
NDSPServer *
NPrinter
AppleTalk
On
Off *
Ethernet Driver
Auto Detect
On *
Off
Comm.Mode
(*7)
Half Duplex *
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type
(*7)
10 Base-T *
100 Base-TX
Spanning Tree
Not Use *
Use
MAC Address
Ext. Interface
000085XXXXXX
No *
IEEE1394
Return Defaults No *
Yes
Maintenance
Repl. maint cart No
Yes
Replace P.head No
Yes
Repl. S.
Cleaner
No
Yes
Move Printer
Level 1 *
Level 2
Level 3
System Setup
46 Printer Parts
Warning
Buzzer
Off
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
On *
Detect
Mismatch
Pause
Warning
None *
Keep Paper
Size
Off *
On
Paper Size
Basis
Sht Selection 1 ISO A3+ *
13"x19"(Super
B)
Sht Selection 2 ISO B1
28"x40" (ANSI
F)
Roll Switching
Use Optimal
Size *
No
RollSwitching
TrimEdge
Reload
Automatic
Off *
On
Noz. Check
Freq.
Off
1 page
10 pages
Automatic *
CarriageScan
Wdth
Automatic *
Fixed
Sleep Timer
5 min. *
10 min.
15 min.
20 min.
30 min.
40 min.
50 min.
60 min.
Printer Parts 47
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
240 min.
Length Unit
meter *
feet/inch
Time Zone
0:London
(GMT)
+1:Paris,Rome
+2:Athens,
Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,
Baku
+5:Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong Kong
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11New
Caledonia
+12:Wellington
-12:Eniwetok
-11:Midway is.
-10Hawaii
(AHST)
-9:Alaska
(AKST)
-8:Oregon
(PST)
-7:Arizona
(MST)
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork
(EST)
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos
Aires
-2:
-1:Cape Verde
Date Format
48 Printer Parts
yyyy/mm/dd *
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
dd/mm/yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
Date & Time
Date
yyyy/mm/dd
(*8)
Time
hh:mm
Language
Contrast Adj.
-4, -3, -2, -1, 0*,
+1, +2, +3, +4
Reset
PaprSetngs
No
Yes
Erase HDD Data High Speed
No
Yes
Secure High
Spd.
No
Yes
Secure
No
Yes
Output Method
Print *
Print (Auto Del)
Save: Box
Save and Print
Off *
On
Printer Parts 49
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Save: Shared
Box
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Off
On *
Test Print
Status Print
No
Yes
Paper Details
No
Yes
Print Job Log
No
Yes
Menu Map
No
Yes
Nozzle Check
No
Yes
Information
System Info
Error Log
1:xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2:xxxxxxxx-xxxx
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Available only if a roll is loaded.
Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.
Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Print Length.
Not displayed if IP Mode is Manual.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.See the Media Conguration Tool Guide
(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
*6: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.
*7: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*9: Available after you have used Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. once.
*10: Not displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*11: Follows the setting in Length Unit.
Caution
• Only the following menus are displayed during printing.
• Menu Durng Prtng
Choose this menu to display Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information.
• Job Mgmt Menu
Choose this menu to display Job Management.
50 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Submenus
Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the
following order.
• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
• Information on the loaded paper
• Printer information
• HP-GL/2 settings information
For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.67)
Printer Parts 51
Control Panel
Main menu during printing
The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.36)
For details on menu items available during printing, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.66)
Second
Seventh
First Level
Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Level
Level
Menu Durng Head
Head
Prtng
Cleaning *
Cleaning A
*
Head
Cleaning B
Fine Band
Adj.
From -5 to 5
Information
System Info
Error Log
1:xxxxxxxx xxxx
2:xxxxxxxx xxxx
52 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings
Main menu items are described in the following tables.
For instructions on selecting or setting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.36)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.40)
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Paper Cutting
This command is available only if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. However, if paper cannot be
advanced to the cut position, it will not be cut. In this case, manually advance
the roll before cutting it. (→P.135)
Rep. Ink Tank
When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen. (→P.563)
Head Cleaning
Printhead cleaning options. (→P.578)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign
substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved
by Head Cleaning A.
Paper Menu
Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.54)
Paper Details
Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and
borderless printing options. (→P.55)
Job Management
Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.57)
GL2 Settings
Specify settings for HP-GL/2 printing. (→P.58)
Adjust Printer
Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.
(→P.60)
Interface Setup
Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.61)
Maintenance
Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to
move the printer. (→P.62)
System Setup
Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display
language. (→P.63)
Test Print
Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Paper Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper
Details.
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type
and size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is
general, not specic in nature.)
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
Information
Displays printer information and an error log. (→P.65)
Printer Parts 53
Control Panel
Paper Menu
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Cut Sheet Type (*1)
Choose the type of sheets.
(→P.149)
Roll1(Uppr) Type (*1)
Roll2 (Lwr) Type (*1)
Choose the type of roll.
(→P.113)
Roll1(Uppr)Lngth
Roll2(Lwr) Lngth
Displayed if ManageRemainRoll is On.
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is
displayed in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.
ManageRemainRoll
Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The
printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose
Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.
(→P.136)
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104) The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the
Control Panel ) are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if
you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
54 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Paper Details
Setting Item
(The type of paper is Roll DryingTime
displayed here.)(*1)
Scan Wait Time
Description, Instructions
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan
in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink
dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.
Feed Priority
Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select
Automatic. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper
an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print Length
may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.
Adjust Length
Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of
the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the
discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by
choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends
to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower
adjustment value.
Head Height
Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.551)
Skew Check Lv.
If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper
that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew
detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection.
However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note
that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
VacuumStrngth
Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
(→P.561)
Width Detection
Specify this option to print inside boundaries or in other cases
when specifying a particular starting position for printing. Paper
width and skew are not detected if you select Off. If paper is
loaded askew, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
NearEnd RollMrgn Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to
ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
Cut Speed
Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing
Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and
keeps the cutter sharp.
Trim Edge First
If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
Cutting Mode
Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed
cutter.
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after
printing. If you choose Manual, the paper will not be cut after
printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.
Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped
immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.
Printer Parts 55
Control Panel
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
(The type of paper is Bordless Margin
displayed here.)(*1)
Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the
paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless
printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic
is selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not
detected automatically, and the document is printed without
borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.
CutDustReduct.
If you choose On, a line will be printed at the cut position when
paper cutting is selected. This option reduces the amount of
debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use
adhesive paper. (→P.144)
NearEnd Sht Mrgn Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better
printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm, it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
Return Defaults
Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the default values.
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104) The type of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the
Control Panel ) is changed when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.
56 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Job Management
Setting Item
Print Job
Job List
Stored Job Mailbox
List
(Choose a
print job)
(Enter a
password
if one has
been set.)
Delete
Delete the current job or
queued jobs. (→P.490)
Preempt
Jobs
Print the job rst after the
current print job is nished.
(→P.490)
Job List
Print Job
List
Job Log
(Choose
from
information
about the
last three
print jobs.)
HDD
HDDSpace
Information
Description, Instructions
(Choose a Print
print job)
Delete
Print the saved job.
Delete the saved job.
Print a list of saved print jobs.
Document
Name
Displays the document name
in the last print job.
User Name
Displays the name of the user
who sent the print job.
Page
Count
Displays the number of pages
in the print job.
Job Status
Displays the results of the
print job processed.
Print Start
Time
Displays the time when the
print job was started.
Print End
Time
Displays the time when the
print job was nished.
Print Time
Displays the time required to
print the job.
Print Size
Displays the paper size in the
print job.
Media
Type
Displays the paper type in the
print job.
Interface
Displays the interface used
for the print job.
Ink
Consumed
Displays the ink consumption.
Displays the space available
on the printer’s hard disk.
Printer Parts 57
Control Panel
GL2 Settings
Setting Item
Color Mode
Description, Instructions
Monochrome
Print in monochrome.
Color (CAD) 1 *
Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2
Print in brighter colors.
Color (CAD) 3
Print emulating the Canon BJ-W3000/W3050, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers.(*1)
Color (CAD) 4
Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors resembling
colors produced by these printers.(*1)
Color (CAD) 5
Print emulating the HP Designjet 1000, in colors resembling
colors produced by these printers.(*1)
Color (CAD) 6
Print emulating the HP Designjet 4000/4500, in colors resembling
colors produced by these printers.(*1)
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
Print (Economy)
Although printing quality is diminished, less ink is consumed than
in regular printing. Select On to conserve ink.
Input Resolution
Choose the printer input resolution, 600dpi or 300dpi.
Paper Source
Choose the source of paper for HP-GL/2 printing.
Conserve Paper
Conserves paper when printing.
Line Cap
Choose the shape of the end point, determined by Software
or Rounded.
• If you choose Software
Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is
specied by the application, the result is as shown in the
gure.
• If you choose Rounded
Smoothing
Choose whether to print arcs as smooth curved lines or as
multiple connected line segments.
• If you choose Software
Operation is determined by the application. If nothing is
specied by the application, the result is as shown in the
gure.
Note: By default, this is a 72-sided gure
58 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Smoothing
• If you choose Smooth
Line Width
Choose the width for printing lines if no width is specied in the
data. Dots in the line width are 300 dpi each.
ThickenFineLines
Select On to print ne lines more distinctly.
AdjustFaintLines
If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors
of other shapes, selecting Off may help produce the expected
results. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.
Auto Rotate
If the long side of an original is shorter than the roll width, the
original is automatically rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper.
Similarly, if the long side of an original in landscape orientation is
longer than the roll width and the short side is shorter than the
roll width, the original is repositioned to t on the paper.
HP RTL print jobs are not rotated.(*2)
Nesting
On-the-Fly
Use Nesting
Selecting On will store print jobs until multiple documents can be
arranged to ll up the roll width, instead of printing each print
job as it is received.
Nesting WaitTime
Specify a time to wait until printing, as desired.
Cut Lines
Select On to print cut lines between each document on the roll.
Selecting On will start printing jobs sooner if you are printing
only HP RTL print jobs and printing would not start until later.
However, images may be omitted in some cases, so be sure
to check the printing results.
*1: It is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the specied printer exactly.
*2: Because HP RTL images are not rotated even if the paper is rotated 90 degrees, images may be cut off
or the blank paper may be ejected. In this case, set Auto Rotate to Off.
Printer Parts 59
Control Panel
Adjust Printer
Setting Item
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for
the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the
printing direction. (→P.544)
Advanced Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern
for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to
spaces between nozzles and colors and the printing direction.
(→P.544)
Auto Print
Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the
Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead.
(→P.544)
Manual Head Adj
Auto Band Adj.
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead
alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment
value manually based on the resulting pattern. (→P.546)
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
(→P.554)
Advanced Adj.
Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon
paper, or paper for purposes other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note
that this function takes more time and requires more ink than
Standard Adj.. (→P.554)
Manual Band Adj
Adjust Length
Head Inc. Adj.
60 Printer Parts
Description, Instructions
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount
based on the paper type.
(→P.556)
A:High ( Adjust
Length A )
B:Standard/Draft (
Adjust Length B )
Prints a test pattern for particular types of paper to compensate
for paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the
amount of adjustment. (→P.559)
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the orientation of
the Printhead. (→P.548)
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
EOP Timer
TCP/IP
Specify the timeout period before cancellation of
print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.
IP Mode
Protocol
Choose whether the printer IP address is
congured automatically or a static IP address
is entered manually.
DHCP
BOOTP
Specify the protocol used to congure the IP
address automatically.
RARP
IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default G/W
NetWare
NetWare
Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting.
Frame Type
Specify the frame type to use.
Print Service
Choose the print service.
AppleTalk
Ethernet
Driver
Specify the printer network information when
using a static IP address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as
well as the network subnet mask and default
gateway.
Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol.
To apply your changes, choose Register
Setting.
Auto Detect
Specify the communication method. To apply
your changes, choose Register Setting.
Choose On for automatic conguration of the
LAN communication protocol. Choose Off
to apply Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type
settings.
Comm.Mode
Choose the LAN communication method.
Ethernet Type
Choose the LAN transfer rate.
Spanning Tree
Choose whether spanning-tree packets are
supported over the LAN.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Ext. Interface
Specify whether or not to use the optional
expansion interface when it is installed.
Return
Defaults
Return Defaults/Execute? is displayed if you
press the ▼ button. Choose OK to restore the
network settings to the default values.
Printer Parts 61
Control Panel
Maintenance
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Repl. maint cart
When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, choose Yes and follow
the instructions on the screen. (→P.586)
Replace P.head
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining
Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions
on the screen. (→P.579)
Repl. S. Cleaner
When replacing the Shaft Cleaner, choose Yes and follow the
instructions on the screen. (→P.586)
Move Printer
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining
Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
When transferring the printer to another location, choose Yes and
follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.601)
62 Printer Parts
Control Panel
System Setup
Setting Item
Warning
Description, Instructions
Buzzer
Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for
warnings and three times for errors.
Detect Mismatch
Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning message)
during printing if the type of paper specied in the printer menu
does not match the type in the printer driver. Choose None to
continue to print without notication. Choose Pause to have
printing paused under these circumstances. In this case, you
can continue printing by pressing the Online button.
Keep Paper Size
Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing
instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu
will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if
the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the
margin from being printed.
Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the
margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the
printer menu, text or images will not be cut off. However, this
requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to
the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin setting of
the printer menu.
Paper Size Basis
Roll Switching
TrimEdge Reload
Sht Selection 1
If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+
or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is
detected.
Sht Selection 2
If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO B1
or 28"x40" (ANSI F) is applied when an intermediate size is
detected.
Use Optimal Size
Selects the optimal paper size to minimize the amount of paper
wasted.
No RollSwitching
Prints using the roll currently advanced on the Platen.
Specify whether to trim the leading edge of the currently
retracted roll when the roll is advanced. Cut the edge if you are
concerned about any marks left on the roll when the roll is left
in the retracted position. Selecting On will always trim the edge
when the roll is advanced from the retracted position. Selecting
Automatic will trim the edge when the roll has been in the
retracted position for two days or more.
Printer Parts 63
Control Panel
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Noz. Check Freq.
Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.
Choose 1 page to check once per printed page. Choose 10
pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose Automatic
to have the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks
based on the frequency of nozzle use.
CarriageScanWdth
For specifying the carriage scan width during printing. Select
Automatic for movement equivalent to the width of paper
loaded. Selecting Fixed will reduce any soiling on the back of
the paper, although printing may take a little longer.
Sleep Timer
Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
Length Unit
Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed.
You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the
remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.
Time Zone
Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in
this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
Date Format
Specify the date format.
Date & Time
Date
Set the current date.
Time
Set the current time. Available only if the Date setting is
specied.
Language
Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
Contrast Adj.
Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
Reset PaprSetngs
Restores settings that you have changed with Media
Conguration Tool to the default values.
Erase HDD Data
Output Method
High Speed
Erases le management data for print job data stored on the
printer’s hard disk. (→P.542)
Secure High Spd.
Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. (→P.542)
Secure
Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data
(one time each). Verication is performed to check if the data
was correctly written. (→P.542)
Print
Select the output method.
To print as usual, select Print. Selecting Print (Auto Del) will
print the job and then delete the data from the printer’s hard
disk. Selecting Save: Box 01 will only save the print job in the
box, without printing it.
Print (Auto Del)
Save: Box 01
Save and Print
Select On to print the job after it has been saved.
Save: Shared Box
Select Off to print without saving jobs in the box shared among
multiple users.
64 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Error Log
Description, Instructions
Firmware
Displays the printer rmware version.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT database format.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address of the printer.
IP
Displays the printer’s IP address.
1: xxxxxxxx-xxxx
2: xxxxxxxx-xxxx
Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).
Printer Parts 65
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)
Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.
For instructions on selecting or setting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.36)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.40)
Setting Item
Menu Durng Prtng Head Cleaning
Description, Instructions
Printhead cleaning options. (→P.578)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or
contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing
is not improved by Head Cleaning A.
Fine Band Adj.
Fine-tune the feed amount manually.
Information
Displays the information about the printer and history of print
jobs. (→P.66)
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Error Log
Firmware
Displays the version of the printer and rmware.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT database format.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address.
IP
Displays the IP address.
HDDSpace
Displays the space available on the printer’s hard disk.
1: xxxxxxxx-xxxx
Displays the two most recent error message numbers, most
recent rst.
2: xxxxxxxx-xxxx
66 Printer Parts
Description, Instructions
Control Panel
Submenu Display
Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, printer information, and HP-GL/2 settings information.
Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.
Note
• Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
• After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.
The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the
Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if ink level
detection is not on.
Remaining ink is indicated as follows.
Information on the loaded paper
Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.
Printer Parts 67
Control Panel
Printer information
Displays the rmware version, serial number, free hard disk space, IP address, and interface information.
HP-GL/2 setting information
HP-GL/2 settings information is displayed on three screens.
68 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Status Print
You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.
With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the
status of consumables.
Printing Status Print reports
1.
Load paper.
If using sheets, load paper of A4/Letter size. You will need at least four sheets.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Checking the information in the Status Print report
The following information is included in the Status Print report.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print
Printer model
Firm
Firmware Version
Boot
Boot ROM Version
MIT(DBF)
MIT Database Format Version
MIT(DB)
MIT Database Version
S/N
Printer serial number
MAC
The printer’s MAC address
IP
IP Address
MC
Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)
C, M, Y, MBK, BK
Ink levels.
The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.
Media Menu
Information on the loaded paper.
Cut Sheet Type
Roll1(Uppr) Type
Roll2 (Lwr) Type
ManageRemainRoll
Job Management
The free space on the printer’s hard disk drive.
HDD Information
HDD Space
Printer Parts 69
Control Panel
GL2 Settings
HP-GL/2 setting values.
Color Mode
Print Quality
Print (Economy)
Input Resolution
Paper Source
Conserve Paper
Line Cap
Smoothing
Line Width
ThickenFineLines
AdjustFaintLines
Auto Rotate
Nesting
Use Nesting
Nesting WaitTime
Cut Lines
On-The-Fly
Adjust Printer
Current printer settings.
Auto Head Adj.
Printhead adjustment value.
Auto Print
Information
The past ve error codes.
Error Log
01 - 05
70 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Current network settings.
EOP Timer
Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and
canceling printing.
TCP/IP
Settings related to TCP/IP.
IP Mode
Protocol
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting
IP Setting values.
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Default
G/W
NetWare
NetWare settings.
NetWare
Frame Type
Print Service
AppleTalk
Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.
Ethernet Driver
Ethernet Driver settings.
Auto Detect
Comm.Mode
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree
MAC Address
Ext.Interface
Information about the extended interface.
Printer Parts 71
Control Panel
System Setup
System settings.
Warning
Current warning and error settings.
Buzzer
Detect Mismatch
Keep Media Size
Current paper-related settings.
Paper Size Basis
Sheet Selection
1
Sheet Selection
2
Roll Switching
TrimEdge Reload
Noz. Check Freq.
Nozzle-check settings.
CarriageScanWdth
Carriage scan width setting.
Sleep Timer
Printer system settings.
Length Unit
Time Zone
Date Format
Language
Contrast Adj.
Output Method
Save and Print
Save:Shared Box
72 Printer Parts
Current output method setting.
Control Panel
Network (RemoteUI)
Current network settings used by RemoteUI.
TCP/IP
Frame Type
Use DHCP
Use BOOTP
Use RARP
Enable DNS Dynamic
Update
Use Zeroconf Function
IP Address*
Subnet Mask*
Gateway Address*
LPD Printing
IPP Printing
IPP Printer URI
RAW Printing
Raw Port Number
Raw Mode Bi-direction
FTP Printing
SMTP Server Address*
Primary DNS Server
Address*
Secondary DNS Server
Address*
DNS Host Name*
DNS Domain Name*
Multicast DNS Service
Name
*:Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
NetWare
NetWare settings.
Frame Type
IPX External Network
Number*
Node Number*
Print Service
*:Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.
Printer Parts 73
Control Panel
Bindery PServer
File Server
Name*
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > Bindery PServer is
selected.
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
Polling Interval
RPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > RPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
NDS PServer
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NDS PServer is selected.
Tree Name*
Context Name*
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
Polling Interval*
NPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
*:Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
AppleTalk
Current AppleTalk settings.
Phase Type
Name*
Network Number*
Zone*
*:Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
74 Printer Parts
Control Panel
HEAD LOT NUMBER
Printhead lot number.
LOT
PARTS STATUS
Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.
COUNTER A-Y
COUNTER
Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how
much they have been used).
CUTTER
MEDIA
MEDIA1-7
NAME
TTL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
AFTER INSTALLATION
Printer Parts 75
Control Panel
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations
You can refer to instructions on the printer control panel when loading paper, replacing ink tanks, or performing
other operations.
How to view instructions
Once you complete an action described in the instructions, the printer detects the action and switches to the
next instruction screen.
In the case of actions the printer cannot detect, instruction screens are switched every four seconds, and
the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly.
When all actions in the sequence are nished, the instruction screen for the next step is displayed.
Note
• During a continuous display of instructions, you can press the ◄ button to pause the instructions
on the current screen.
Press the ◄ or ► button to display the previous or next screens. If you do not press the ◄ or ► button
within 30 seconds, continuous display is resumed.
Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step.
76 Printer Parts
Control Panel
Viewing instructions for loading or removing rolls
1.
2.
3.
Press the Load/Eject button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Load Roll or Remove Roll, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll1(Uppr)Lngth or Roll2 (Lwr) Type, and then press the OK button.
Instructions are now displayed.
Viewing instructions for loading or removing sheets
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
Instructions are now displayed.
Printer Parts 77
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
Roll Holder Set
Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-44 is
for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. (→P.115)
• Roll Holder Set RH2-44
• Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)
• Attachments
Using the 2-Inch Paper
Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Core Attachment
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
#1
#2
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board
An interface board to add an IEEE 1394 (also called "FireWire") port.
• IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-05
Caution
• Note that EB-04 is incompatible.
For instructions on installing the IEEE 1394 expansion board, refer to the documentation provided with the
optional IEEE 1394 expansion board.
78 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Printer Specications
Specications
Important
• This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.
• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.
Printer
Power supply
Power
consumption
100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
During operation
190 W max.
Sleep mode
100-120 V: 5 W max.
(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is
installed.)
220-240 V: 6 W max.
(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is
installed.)
Off
1 W max. (*1)
During operation
Approx. 52 dB (A) max. (6.8 bels or less)
Standby
Approx. 35 dB (A) max.
Operating
environment
Temperature
15-30°C (59-86°F)
Humidity
10-80%, non-condensing
Dimensions (W ×
D × H)
Printer only
1,893 × 766 × 1,144 mm (74.5 × 30.2 × 45.0 in)
Weight
Printer and Stand
(not including the
Printhead and Ink
Tank )
Approx. 178 kg (392.4 lb)
Space for
installation (W ×
D × H)
Printer and Wheeled
Output Stacker
2,293 × 1,837 × 1,500 mm (90.3 × 72.3 × 59.1 in)
Operating noise
Printer and Stand
1,893 × 1,291 × 1,144 mm (74.5 × 50.8 × 45.0 in)
(including Roll Holder
and Wheeled Output
Stacker )
Applicable standards
International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting Green
Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, Eco Declaration, WEEE, U.S.
presidential directives
*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption,
turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
Printer Parts 79
Printer Specications
Printing performance
Print method
Bubblejet
Maximum resolution
2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically
Printhead
PF-03
Number of nozzles
MBK: 5,120; others: 2,560 per color
*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.
Interface
Expansion Board Slots
1
USB 2.0(*1)
Format
Internal port
Mode
Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer
Connector
Series B (4-pin)
Format
Internal port
Specication
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u
100BASE-TX/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE 802.3x Full
Duplex
Protocols
IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, TCP/IP, AppleTalk,
HTTP
Format
Optional board (compatible with the expansion slot)
Specication
IEEE 1394-1995, conforms to P1394a Specication ver. 2.0,
half duplex, Data/Strb differential serial
Transfer speed
100/200/400 Mbps
Connector
Conforms to IEEE 1394-1995 (6-pin), no power supply
Ethernet
IEEE 1394
*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:
•
•
•
•
80 Printer Parts
Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible
Operating system: Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000 or Mac OS X 10.3.3 or later
USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)
USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable
Printer Specications
Ink
Ink Tank
Capacity
MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black Pigment ink
Ink, or black ink for matte
paper)
PFI-303MBK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-703MBK (700 ml [23.7  oz])
BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-303BK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-703BK (700 ml [23.7  oz])
C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-303C (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or PFI-703C
(700 ml [23.7  oz])
M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-303M (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-703M (700 ml [23.7  oz])
Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-303Y (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or PFI-703Y
(700 ml [23.7  oz])
330 or 700 ml (11.2 or 23.7  oz) per
color (*1)
*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 330 ml (11.2  oz) each.
Printer Parts 81
Printer Specications
Paper (*1)
Paper width
Rolls
254-1,117.6 mm (10-44 in)
Sheets
203-1,117.6 mm (8-44 in)
Length of one page Rolls
Thickness
Paper Size
Print area
203 (*2)-18,000 mm (8-708.7 in)
Sheets
203-1,600 mm (8-63 in)
Rolls
0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)
Sheets
0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)
Roll width
44-in. Roll (1117.6mm), 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1
Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll (914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll
(841.0mm), 30-in. Roll (762.0mm), JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm),
24-in. Roll (609.6mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm), JIS B2/B3
Roll (515.0mm), 17-in. Roll (431.8mm), ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm), 16-in. Roll (406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm),
ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
Sheets
ISO A0, ISO A1, ISO A2, ISO A2+, ISO A3, ISO A3+, ISO A4,
ISO B0, ISO B1, ISO B2, ISO B3, ISO B4, JIS B0, JIS B1,
JIS B2, JIS B3, JIS B4, 34"x44" (ANSI E), 28"x40" (ANSI
F), 22"x34"(ANSI D), 17"x22"(ANSI C), 13"x19" (Super
B), 11"x17" (Ledger), Legal (8.5"x14"), Letter (8.5"x11"),
36"x48" (ARCH E), 30"x42" (ARCH E1), 26"x38" (ARCH E2),
27"x39" (ARCH E3), 24"x36" (ARCH D), 18"x24" (ARCH C),
12"x18" (ARCH B), 9"x12" (ARCH A), DIN C0, DIN C1, DIN
C2, DIN C3, DIN C4, 20"x24", 18"x22", 14"x17", 12"x16",
10"x12", 10"x15", 8"x10", US Photo 16"x20", Poster
20"x30", Poster 30"x40", Poster 42"x60", Poster 44"x62",
13"x22", Poster 300x900mm
Normal size
Printable area
• Rolls
3 mm (0.12 in) from each side
• Sheets
3 mm (0.12 in) from the top, 23 mm (0.91 in) from the bottom,
and 3mm (0.12 in) from the left and right sides
For information on the recommended print area, see “Print
Area”. (→P.85)
Borderless printing
(*3)
Printable area (rolls)
0 mm from the top, 0 from the bottom, and 0 mm from the left
and right sides
Supported width for borderless printing
42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in.
Roll (914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm), 24-in. Roll
(609.6mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm), JIS B2/B3 Roll
(515.0mm), 17-in. Roll (431.8mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm),
10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
*2: When supplying paper, use a roll approximately 1,000 mm (1,093.6 yd) or longer.
*3: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.
82 Printer Parts
Printer Specications
Hard Disk
Hard disk capacity
Print job storage capacity
80 GB (print job storage capacity:
48 GB)
Common Box
100 jobs
Personal Boxes
100 jobs
Options
Roll Holder Set
RH2-44
IEEE1394 Expansion Board
EB-05
Printer Parts 83
Printer Specications
Basic Environmental Performance
Printer
Power consumption
Resource efciency
Product safety
Sleep mode
100-120 V: 5 W max.
(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion
board is installed.)
220-240 V: 6 W max.
(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion
board is installed.)
Off
1 W max.
Weight
Printer and Stand : Approx. 178kg (392.4 lb)
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Printer and Stand : 1,893 × 1,291 × 1,144 mm (74.5 ×
50.8 × 45.0 in)
Recycling
Recyclable plastic used for printer body
Toxic substances
Structural components: No prohibited brominated ame
retardants used (PBB, PBDE)
Body plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd) or
halogenated ame retardants used
Operating noise
During operation: Approx. 52 dB (A) max. (6.8 bels or
less)
Standby: Approx. 35 dB (A) max.
Packaging materials
Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd)
84 Printer Parts
None (none in packaging)
Printer Specications
Print Area
A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in
borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.
Note
•
•
•
•
Printable area: The area that can be printed.
There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.
Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.
To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes
the required margin. (→P.251)
Sheets
Rolls
Margins of Printable Area
Bottom
Top Edge
Sides
Edge
3 mm (0.12 23 mm (0.91 3 mm (0.12
in)
in)
in)
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
0/3 mm
(0/0.12 in)
Margins of Recommended Print Area
Bottom
Top Edge
Sides
Edge
20 mm (0.79 23 mm (0.91 5 mm (0.20
in)
in)
in)
20 mm (0.79
in)
5 mm (0.20
in)
5 mm (0.20
in)
Sheets
• Printable Area
a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right
sides is required.
• Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Rolls
• Printable Area
A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides
is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.104)
• Recommended Print Area
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Printer Parts 85
Printing procedure
Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls
or sheets to suit your particular printing application.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing
method that suits your particular printing application, referring to "Working With Various Print Jobs" and
"Enhanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.
Roll printing
Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in
turn loaded in the printer.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.
• Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Ofce applications.
(→P.286)
• Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
(→P.265)
(→P.272)
(→P.258)
• Banner printing
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
(→P.310)
• 90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efciently.
(→P.335)
• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(→P.228)
(→P.234)
(→P.240)
86 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
• Free Layout (Windows) and imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other.
(→P.304)
Note
• Loading two rolls at once (in the Roll 1 (Upper) and Roll 2 (Lower) holders) offers the following
advantages.
• Save the time and effort of switching paper
Loading rolls of different types saves you the time and effort of replacing rolls. You can select the
desired roll in Paper Source in the printer driver.
(→P.397)
(→P.435)
• Automatic selection of the right paper for the print job
Selecting Roll Paper (Auto) in Paper Source in the printer driver enables automatic selection and
printing on the roll that suits the print job from the loaded rolls.
Additionally, loading two rolls of the same type enables nonstop printing of multiple jobs. After one
roll is completely used, the printer switches to the other roll automatically and continues printing.
(→P.146)
Basic Printing Workow 87
Printing procedure
Sheet printing
Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.
• Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.
(→P.228)
(→P.234)
(→P.240)
• Free Layout (Windows) and imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet
programs, and so on) next to each other.
(→P.304)
88 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Rolls
These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.
Follow the steps below to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.
Note
• The procedure varies depending on the ManageRemainRoll setting in the printer menu and whether or
not a barcode has been printed on the loaded roll. (→P.136)
• Steps 6 and 7 are unnecessary if ManageRemainRoll is On and a barcode has been printed
on the roll.
• Step 7 is unnecessary if ManageRemainRoll is Off.
• If the Wheeled Output Stacker is installed, remove it in advance. (→P.159)
• When Width Detection in the printer menu is Off, after you have selected the type of paper in step
6, you will need to enter the roll width. (→P.53)
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.109) (→P.104)
• If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate
automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (→P.139)
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
2.
Select a roll as the paper source. (→P.112)
Basic Printing Workow 89
Printing procedure
3.
Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Rolls (→P.125)
• Sheets (→P.155)
4.
Load the roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.115)
90 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
5.
Load the roll in the printer. (→P.118)
Note
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (→P.629)
6.
Select the type of paper. (→P.113)
7.
Specify the paper length. (→P.114)
Basic Printing Workow 91
Printing procedure
8.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.224)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.226)
Important
• Conrm the type of paper loaded in the printer and specify the same type in the printer driver.
If the type of paper does not match, an error message is displayed and the printing quality may
be affected, or printing may not be possible.
• The paper is too small. (→P.651)
• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.650)
9.
Send the print job.
• Printing in Windows (→P.96)
• Printing in Mac OS X (→P.97)
Start printing.
92 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Sheets
These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.
Note
• For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.109) (→P.104)
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
2.
Remove any loaded paper that will not be used. (→P.155)
Basic Printing Workow 93
Printing procedure
3.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.224)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.226)
4.
Send the print job.
• Printing in Windows (→P.96)
• Printing in Mac OS X (→P.97)
94 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
5.
Load the sheet. (→P.150)
Note
• If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, after you load the sheet, the printer automatically
shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the control panel Display Screen. Select the
type of paper at this point.
(→P.149)
• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you
must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.153)
Start printing.
Basic Printing Workow 95
Printing procedure
Printing in Windows
Print from the application menu.
Important
• The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2008
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
1.
In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
2.
After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the software application. In most cases, the
dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application
Note
• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog
box displayed after clicking Printer.
Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are
displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:
• From the application
(→P.381)
• From the operating system menu
(→P.383)
96 Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Printing in Mac OS X
Print from the application menu after registering the printer.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
Registering the printer
Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).
For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.
(→P.471)
Important
• During this process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. In Mac OS X 10.4 and earlier, you
must enable AppleTalk protocol on the printer before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For
instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks
(Macintosh)”. (→P.473)
Printing from the application software
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
Basic Printing Workow 97
Printing procedure
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
98 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the
printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.
Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or
more during printing.
• If you press the Stop button before printing starts
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings
the printer online.
When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected,
the printer goes ofine.
• If you press the Stop button during printing
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.
• If you press the Stop button when printing is paused
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.
Basic Printing Workow 99
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
Print jobs can be canceled in Windows as follows.
Canceling print jobs in the printer window or imagePROGRAF Status
Monitor
In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the
printer or that are currently being printed.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the computer.
When the transmission is completed, the job is not displayed even during printing.
• After the printer has received the print data from the computer, print jobs are shown in the
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window until the end of printing. It is not displayed before transmission
of print data to the printer, even if the computer has started the process of the data.
1.
Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.
Note
• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or
Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.
2.
Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.
3.
If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been
received by the printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
4.
On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.
100 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs from the Control Panel
Use the Control Panel to cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or that are currently
being printed, as needed.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Basic Printing Workow 101
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X
Cancel print jobs in Mac OS X in one of the following ways.
Canceling print jobs from the printer driver or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor
In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are still being sent to the printer.
Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer
or are currently being printed.
Note
• Print jobs are displayed in the printer window during the transmission of print data from the computer.
After transmission, jobs are not displayed even during printing.
• Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer has
received the print data until the moment printing is nished. They are not displayed before print data is
sent to the printer, even if the computer has started preparing the print data.
1.
2.
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.
3.
If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be canceled, (that is, if the print data has
Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.
already been sent to the printer), click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
102 Basic Printing Workow
Canceling print jobs
4.
Select the print job to cancel and click
to delete the print job.
The job sent to the printer is canceled.
5.
Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.
Important
• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. If you do not
restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.
Canceling print jobs from the Control Panel
Otherwise, you can cancel jobs on the Control Panel if they are being received by the printer or are currently
being printed.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Basic Printing Workow 103
Paper
Handling Paper
Paper
Types of Paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports (such as plain paper, coated paper, glossy photo
paper, proong paper, and CAD paper), refer to the Paper Reference Guide. The Paper Reference Guide
identies types of paper and gives specications, printer driver settings, and tips on handling paper. (See
Paper Reference Guide .)
By downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website, you
can make sure the paper information indicated in the Paper Reference Guide, on the printer Control Panel,
and in the printer driver is up to date.
Note
• Types of paper for which † appears next to the product name are specied as genuine Canon paper.
For other paper, contact the respective manufacturer after reading instructions included with the media
for further information.
104 Handling Paper
Paper
Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support
Information
The Paper Reference Guide can also be accessed from imagePROGRAF Support Information. Follow
these instructions, as appropriate for your operating system.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click the Paper Reference Guide button.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
Handling Paper 105
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click the Paper Reference Guide button.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
106 Handling Paper
Paper
Updating Paper Information
To update the paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer, download the latest
version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media
Conguration Tool, see Media Conguration Tool (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool (Macintosh).
The imagePROGRAF website is accessible from imagePROGRAF Support Information.
Important
• When you use the Media Conguration Tool to update information about paper, the types of paper on
the printer Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software are updated.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click Visit the imagePROGRAF webpage.
The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Handling Paper 107
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.
2. Click Visit the imagePROGRAF webpage.
The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Note
• You can also access the imagePROGRAF website through the following operations.
• Windows
Click the start menu and select Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (iPFxxxx indicates
the printer model) > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool. After the Media Conguration Tool starts
up, click Extra Information.
• Macintosh
In Finder, select Applications > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (iPFxxxx
indicates the printer model) > MCTxxxx. After the Media Conguration Tool starts up, click Extra
Information.
108 Handling Paper
Paper
Paper Sizes
Rolls
Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.
• Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6 in.)
• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches
• Printing side out
1117.6 mm (44.00 in)
Roll Paper Width Settings
in Printer Driver
44-in. Roll (1117.6mm)
No
1066.8 mm (42.00 in)
42-in. Roll (1066.8mm)
Yes
1030.0 mm (40.55 in)
JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm)
Yes
914.4 mm (36.00 in)
36-in. Roll (914.4mm)
Yes
841.0 mm (33.11 in)
ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm)
Yes
762.0 mm (30.00 in)
30-in. Roll (762.0mm)
No
728.0 mm (28.66 in)
JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm)
No
609.6 mm (24.00 in)
24-in. Roll (609.6mm)
Yes
594.0 mm (23.39 in)
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm)
Yes
515.0 mm (20.28 in)
JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm)
Yes
431.8 mm (17.00 in)
17-in. Roll (431.8mm)
Yes
420.0 mm (16.54 in)
ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm)
No
406.4 mm (16.00 in)
16-in. Roll (406.4mm)
No
355.6 mm (14.00 in)
14-in. Roll (355.6mm)
Yes
297.0 mm (11.69 in)
ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm)
No
254.0 mm (10.00 in)
10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
Yes
Custom Media Width
203.2-1118.0 mm (8.00-44.02 in.)
Roll Width
Borderless Printing (*1)
*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.104)
Handling Paper 109
Paper
Sheets
Sheets of the following sizes are supported.
Paper Sizes
Dimensions
ISO A0
841.0 × 1189.0 mm (33.11 × 46.81 in)
ISO A1
594.0 × 841.0 mm (23.39 × 33.11 in)
ISO A2
420.0 × 594.0 mm (16.54 × 23.39 in)
ISO A2+
431.8 × 609.6 mm (17.00 × 24.00 in)
ISO A3
297.0 × 420.0 mm (11.69 × 16.54 in)
ISO A3+
329.0 × 483.0 mm (12.95 × 19.02 in)
ISO A4
210.0 × 297.0 mm (8.27 × 11.69 in)
ISO B0
1000.0 × 1414.0 mm (39.37 × 55.67 in)
ISO B1
707.0 × 1000.0 mm (27.83 × 39.37 in)
ISO B2
500.0 × 707.0 mm (19.69 × 27.83 in)
ISO B3
353.0 × 500.0 mm (13.90 × 19.69 in)
ISO B4
250.0 × 353.0 mm (9.84 × 13.90 in)
JIS B0
1030.0 × 1456.0 mm (40.55 × 57.32 in)
JIS B1
728.0 × 1030.0 mm (28.66 × 40.55 in)
JIS B2
515.0 × 728.0 mm (20.28 × 28.66 in)
JIS B3
364.0 × 515.0 mm (14.33 × 20.28 in)
JIS B4
257.0 × 364.0 mm (10.12 × 14.33 in)
34"x44" (ANSI E)
863.6 × 1117.6 mm (34.00 × 44.00 in)
28"x40" (ANSI F)
711.2 × 1016.0 mm (28.00 × 40.00 in)
22"x34"(ANSI D)
558.8 × 863.6 mm (22.00 × 34.00 in)
17"x22"(ANSI C)
431.8 × 558.8 mm (17.00 × 22.00 in)
11"x17" (Ledger)
279.4 × 431.8 mm (11.00 × 17.00 in)
13"x19" (Super B)
330.2 × 482.6 mm (13.00 × 19.00 in)
Letter (8.5"x11")
215.9 × 279.4 mm (8.50 × 11.00 in)
Legal (8.5"x14")
215.9 × 355.6 mm (8.50 × 14.00 in)
36"x48" (ARCH E)
914.4 × 1219.2 mm (36.00 × 48.00 in)
30"x42" (ARCH E1)
762.0 × 1066.8 mm (30.00 × 42.00 in)
26"x38" (ARCH E2)
660.4 × 965.2 mm (26.00 × 38.00 in)
27"x39" (ARCH E3)
685.8 × 990.6 mm (27.00 × 39.00 in)
24"x36" (ARCH D)
609.6 × 914.4 mm (24.00 × 36.00 in)
18"x24" (ARCH C)
457.2 × 609.6 mm (18.00 × 24.00 in)
12"x18" (ARCH B)
304.8 × 457.2 mm (12.00 × 18.00 in)
9"x12" (ARCH A)
228.6 × 304.8 mm (9.00 × 12.00 in)
DIN C0
917.0 × 1296.0 mm (36.10 × 51.02 in)
110 Handling Paper
Paper
Paper Sizes
Dimensions
DIN C1
648.0 × 917.0 mm (25.51 × 36.10 in)
DIN C2
458.0 × 648.0 mm (18.03 × 25.51 in)
DIN C3
324.0 × 458.0 mm (12.76 × 18.03 in)
DIN C4
229.0 × 324.0 mm (9.02 × 12.76 in)
20"x24"
508.0 × 609.6 mm (20.00 × 24.00 in)
18"x22"
457.2 × 558.8 mm (18.00 × 22.00 in)
14"x17"
355.6 × 431.8 mm (14.00 × 17.00 in)
12"x16"
304.8 × 406.4 mm (12.00 × 16.00 in)
10"x12"
254.0 × 304.8 mm (10.00 × 12.00 in)
10"x15"
254.0 × 381.0 mm (10.00 × 15.00 in)
8"x10"
203.2 × 254.0 mm (8.00 × 10.00 in)
US Photo 16"x20"
406.4 × 508.0 mm (16.00 × 20.00 in)
Poster 20"x30"
508.0 × 762.0 mm (20.00 × 30.00 in)
Poster 30"x40"
762.0 × 1016.0 mm (30.00 × 40.00 in)
Poster 42"x60"
1066.8 × 1524.0 mm (42.00 × 60.00 in)
Poster 44"x62"
1117.6 × 1574.8 mm (44.00 × 62.00 in)
13"x22"
329.0 × 558.0 mm (12.95 × 21.97 in)
Poster 300x900mm
300.0 × 900.0 mm (11.81 × 35.43 in)
Custom Paper Size
203.2 ×203.2 mm (8.00×8.00 in.)-1118.0×1600.0 mm
(44.02×62.99 in.)
Note
• In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system”, such as
ISO A or JIS.
In Windows, some size systems are not available by default. Follow these steps to make them available.
1. Display the printer driver dialog box.
2. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
3. Click Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
4. Select the Display Series check box.
• For details on non-standard paper sizes, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.297)
• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Handling Paper 111
Handling rolls
Handling rolls
Selecting the Paper Source
When advancing paper, press the Feeder Selection button and select the source.
You can determine the selected source by checking which lamp is lit-either the Roll Media lamp (a) or the
Cut Sheet lamp (b).
• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.
• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets.
Note
• If a sheet is loaded when you change the paper source to a roll, Eject sheet? is displayed. Press
the OK button and remove the sheet.
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• When the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.647)
• When the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing is nished.
• When a printer menu operation is in progress
Wait until the operation is nished before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of loading paper
Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of replacing Ink Tank
Finish replacing the Ink Tank before selecting the paper source.
• When the Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.
112 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Important
• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.
(→P.552)
(→P.551)
Note
• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on
the Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic
monitoring of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic monitoring of the remaining
roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.114)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll1(Uppr) Type or Roll2 (Lwr) Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104) By default, Plain Paper
is selected.
• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect printing quality.
• If automatic monitoring of the remaining roll is deactivated ( Off is selected) and you have selected a
type of paper for which width detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must advance the paper
manually to the position for printing. (→P.153)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 113
Handling rolls
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)
When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.
Note
• When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, ManageRemainRoll must be set to On.
• After you select the type of roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the roll length on
the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to
On. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button. The printer will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll1(Uppr)Lngth or Roll2(Lwr) Lngth, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Specify the roll length as follows.
1. Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
114 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls
When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.
Rolls have a two- or three-inch paper core. Use the correct attachment for the paper core. The printer comes
equipped with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment installed.
Using the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Roll Holder Side
Holder Stopper Side
Roll Holder Side
Holder Stopper Side
No Attachment Needed
2-Inch Paper Core
Attachment
3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment #1
3-Inch Paper Core
Attachment #2
Important
• Be sure to use the correct attachment for the size of the roll paper core. The roll edge may be damaged
if you print when using an attachment that does not match, or if you print without using an attachment.
• Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a
roll may cause injury.
• Cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue.
Uneven, dirty, or sticky edges may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.
Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.
• Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll.
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.109) (→P.104)
• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load
the paper.
Handling Paper 115
Handling rolls
1.
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
2.
When using a 3-inch paper core, align the tips (a) of 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 with the
holes (b) of the Roll Holder and insert it rmly.
3.
With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder from the right of
the roll. Insert it rmly until the roll touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder.
Important
• Insert it rmly so that there is no gap between the roll and the ange of the Roll Holder. If there is a
gap, it may cause feeding problems.
• When loading a roll, be careful to avoid hitting the printer hard with the roll. This may damage
the Roll Holder.
116 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
4.
Insert the attachments for the roll paper core on the Holder Stopper.
Align the tips (a) of the attachment with the holes (b) of the Holder Stopper and insert it rmly.
• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2
• 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment
5.
Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position
shown (b), push it rmly in until the ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the
Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.
Important
• Insert the Holder Stopper rmly onto the roll. Otherwise, it may cause feeding problems.
Handling Paper 117
Handling rolls
Loading Rolls in the Printer
Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.
You can load rolls in two positions, in the Roll 1 (Upper) and Roll 2 (Lower) holders.
Note
• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Rolls (→P.125)
• Sheets (→P.155)
• If the Wheeled Output Stacker is installed, remove it in advance. (→P.159)
• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.597)
• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load
the paper. (→P.76)
Loading rolls in the Roll 1 (Upper) holder
1.
Conrm that a roll is selected as the paper source. (→P.112)
2.
Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.
118 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
3.
Holding the Roll Holder so that the side with the white gear faces the side of the Roll Holder
Slot with a white gear, load the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the grooves (b) on both ends of the
Roll Holder Slot.
Caution
• Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it.
• Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Roll Holder shaft (a) and the guide grooves
(b) when loading rolls.
Note
• For instructions on attaching the Roll Holder to rolls, see “Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls”.
(→P.115)
Handling Paper 119
Handling rolls
4.
Using both hands, pull out the roll evenly on both ends and insert it in the Paper Feed Slot
(a). Advance the roll until the buzzer sounds.
Important
• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect
the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the
printing surface.
• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.
5.
Lower the Ejection Guide.
6.
Close the Top Cover.
120 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
7.
Press the OK button.
The paper is now advanced.
After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the
Display Screen.
At this point, specify the type of paper. (→P.113)
Handling Paper 121
Handling rolls
Loading rolls in the Roll 2 (Lower) holder
Caution
• Do not detach the Roll Unit in the following cases.
• During printing
Vibration from removing the Roll Unit may affect the printing quality.
• If a sheet is loaded in the printer
The sheet may be ejected, and (rarely) it may be bent.
1.
Conrm that a roll is selected as the paper source. (→P.112)
2.
Holding the Roll Unit Lever (a), pull out the Roll Unit.
3.
Holding the Roll Holder so that the side with the white gear faces the side of the Roll Holder
Slot with a white gear, load the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the grooves (b) on both ends of the
Roll Holder Slot.
Caution
• Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it.
• Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Roll Holder shaft (a) and the guide grooves
(b) when loading rolls.
122 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Note
• For instructions on attaching the Roll Holder to rolls, see “Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls”.
(→P.115)
4.
Pull out the roll evenly on both ends and insert it in the Paper Feed Slot (a). Advance the roll until
the buzzer sounds.
Important
• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect
the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the
printing surface.
• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.
5.
In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit into the printer.
Handling Paper 123
Handling rolls
6.
7.
Position the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer. (→P.159)
Press the OK button.
The paper is now advanced.
After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the
Display Screen.
At this point, specify the type of paper. (→P.113)
124 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Remove rolls from the printer as follows.
Note
• If the Wheeled Output Stacker is installed, remove it in advance. (→P.159)
• If you need to cut a printed roll, select Paper Cutting in the printer menu and cut the roll at the desired
position. (→P.139)
• If you have selected Media Menu > ManageRemainRoll > On in the printer menu, a barcode indicating
the amount of paper left is printed on the leading edge of the roll. However, barcodes are not printed on
some types of paper, and only a text message indicating paper information is printed.
Caution
• If you have activated automatic monitoring of the remaining roll paper, do not remove the roll before the
barcode is printed. You will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left if you move the Release
Lever and remove the roll before the barcode is printed on it.
Removing rolls from the Roll 1 (Upper) position
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 1 (Upper), and then press the OK button.
The roll can now be removed.
4.
Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.
Handling Paper 125
Handling rolls
5.
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.
6.
Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.
Note
• For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see “Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls”.
(→P.129)
7.
Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover.
Note
• To load new paper in the printer at this point, see “Loading Rolls in the Printer”. (→P.118)
126 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Removing rolls from the Roll 2 (Lower) position
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Remove Roll, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll 2 (Lower), and then press the OK button.
The roll can now be removed.
4.
After conrming that the Online lamp is off, hold the Roll Unit Lever (a) and pull out the Roll Unit.
5.
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.
6.
Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.
Note
• For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see “Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls”.
(→P.129)
• To load new paper in the printer at this point, see “Loading Rolls in the Printer”. (→P.118)
Handling Paper 127
Handling rolls
7.
In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit in with both hands.
128 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls
1.
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
2.
Remove the Roll Holder from the roll.
3.
When removing attachments, push the tips (a) in as you remove the attachment.
• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #1 ( Roll Holder side)
• 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment #2 ( Holder Stopper side)
Handling Paper 129
Handling rolls
• 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Important
• Store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If
paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing
quality when you use it again.
130 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
Note
• If you do not nd any scraps or jams, see “Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found”. (→P.615)
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
Handling Paper 131
Handling rolls
4.
If the Cutter is out, move the Cutter to the right side, away from the paper.
Important
• If the Cutter is on the left side, be sure to move it to the right. If the Cutter is on the left side when you
turn the printer on, the printer may rip the paper.
5.
Lift the Release Lever.
6.
Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or
cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
132 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
7.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
8.
Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the
Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b),
keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.
Important
• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the
paper from being advanced straight.
• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.
9.
Close the Top Cover.
Handling Paper 133
Handling rolls
10.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.
Note
• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by selecting Paper Cutting in the printer menu.
(→P.139)
134 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
When the printer is ofine, you can advance or retract the roll on the Platen by pressing ▲ or ▼.
1.
2.
3.
Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
Conrm that a roll is selected as the paper source. (→P.112)
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to advance or retract the roll.
Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.
Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.
Note
• Holding down ▲ or ▼ for less than a second moves the roll about 1 mm (0.04 in).
Holding down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second moves the roll until you release the button. Release the
button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more..
Handling Paper 135
Handling rolls
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left
If you have activated automatic monitoring of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text
is printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. When this function is activated and
barcodes are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are
loaded. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.
Note
• If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed.
Important
• Because this function is not compatible with clear lm, an error message may be displayed ( The roll is
empty. ) after you load clear lm. For this reason, deactivate the function before loading clear lm.
• If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.
Follow these steps to activate monitoring of the remaining roll paper.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select ManageRemainRoll, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the setting, and then press the OK button.
136 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still
wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during
ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.
Windows
1.
Display the printer driver dialog box.
(→P.383)
2.
Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type.
3.
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in
C Between Pages and D Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.389)
Handling Paper 137
Handling rolls
Mac OS X
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in
Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type.
C Between Pages and D Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.430)
Note
• By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.
• To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting
Mode to Eject in the printer menu.
(→P.139)
138 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.
Cutting Method
Automatic
The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter
Unit following printer driver settings.
Eject
(→P.140)
Menu Settings
Cutting
Mode
Driver Setting
Automatic Auto Cut
Yes
Choose this setting if you prefer not to
have documents dropped immediately after
printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.
To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit, hold
down the Stop button for a second or more.
Eject
Yes
Manual
(→P.141)
Choose this setting when using media that
cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit.
Cut each page from the roll using scissors.
For continuous printing (if you will cut each
page later), in Auto Cut, select Yes, or
select Print Cut Guideline.
(→P.366)
Manual
No Yes
Print Cut
Guideline
Paper
Cutting
(→P.142)
Choose this option if you want to cut pages Paper
by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual Cutting
cutting after printing when the printer driver
is congured to Auto Cut > No or Print Cut
Guideline.
Otherwise choose this option if you want to
cut the roll edge after loading a roll.
Yes
No Print
Cut
Guideline
Note
• Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have specied Auto Cut > Yes in the printer driver.
• With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the
roll is cut.
Cut rolls manually in the following cases:
Handling Paper 139
Handling rolls
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)
Important
• When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the
paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.
• Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the
printing quality.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
7.
As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold down the Stop button
for at least a second to cut the roll.
140 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit )
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.
7.
Press the Online button.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
8.
Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.
9.
Press the Online button.
The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.
Handling Paper 141
Handling rolls
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)
1.
After pressing the Online button to bring the printer ofine, press ▲ or ▼ to advance the roll
paper to the position for cutting.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.
Caution
• If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in
some cases before cutting.
142 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this
case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to
make the edge straight after you load a roll.
Trim Edge First offers the following options.
• Automatic
If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 40 mm (1.6 in) or
more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge,
and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 40 mm. However, paper
may sometimes be cut, depending on the state of the leading edge.
• Off
The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.
For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• On
The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut
off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
Note
• If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv. to Loose for a higher skew
detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when
detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.
Handling Paper 143
Handling rolls
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to
generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up
this function to be activated for some types of paper.
When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.
Important
• Do not activate this function for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or thin paper. This may
impair cutting and cause paper jams.
• Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before
borderless printing.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.
144 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
Roll Holder Set
Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-44 is
for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. (→P.115)
• Roll Holder Set RH2-44
• Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)
• Attachments
Using the 2-Inch Paper
Using the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
Core Attachment
2-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment
#1
#2
Handling Paper 145
Handling rolls
Automatic Roll Switching
Two rolls can be loaded on the printer, in the Roll 1 (Upper) position and in the Roll 2 (Lower) position. Selecting
Roll Paper (Auto) in Paper Source in the printer driver enables automatic selection and printing on the roll that
suits the print job from the loaded rolls.
The printer determines which roll to use based on these conditions, in the following order.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, neither paper feed slot is loaded with paper suitable for the print job.
Check the print job and replace the paper. (→P.125)
1.
When ManageRemainRoll in the printer menu is set to On, the roll longer than the length of a
single page of the print job is used.
When ManageRemainRoll is set to Off and both rolls are longer than the print job, the second
condition determines which roll is used.
Note
• When the roll currently advanced is a type of paper that cannot be cut and the printed pages have
not been cut, the currently advanced roll is used.
• If both rolls are too short, an error message is displayed.
2.
Use a type of paper that matches the print job.
When both or neither loaded roll matches the type of paper in the print job, the third condition
determines which roll is used.
Note
• When Detect Mismatch in the printer menu is set to Warning or None, the roll is determined
by the following conditions.
• When neither loaded roll matches the type of paper in the print job and Detect Mismatch in the
printer menu is set to Pause, an error message is displayed.
3.
If Roll Switching in the printer menu is set to No RollSwitching, the currently advanced roll is
used.
If Roll Switching in the printer menu is set to Use Optimal Size, the fourth condition determines
which roll is used.
4.
When the print job calls for borderless printing, the roll compatible with borderless printing is used.
When the print job does not specify borderless printing, or if both rolls are compatible with
borderless printing, the fth condition determines which roll is used.
Note
• If neither roll is compatible with borderless printing, an error message is displayed.
146 Handling Paper
Handling rolls
5.
Use a size of paper that matches the width specied in the print job.
When both loaded rolls match the width of paper in the print job or the width is not specied in
the job, the sixth condition determines which roll is used.
When Width Detection is set to Off, the seventh condition determines which roll is used.
Note
• When neither loaded roll matches the width specied in the print job, an error message is displayed.
6.
Use a size of paper that accommodates the width specied in the print job.
When both loaded rolls can accommodate the width specied in the print job, the seventh
condition determines which roll is used.
Note
• When Detect Mismatch in the printer menu is set to Warning or None, the roll is determined
by the following conditions.
• When neither loaded roll is wide enough for the print job and Detect Mismatch in the printer menu is
set to Pause, an error message is displayed.
7.
The roll closest to the roll width specied in the print job is used.
If both rolls are equally close to the specied width, the currently advanced roll is used.
Handling Paper 147
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Selecting the Paper Source
When advancing paper, press the Feeder Selection button and select the source.
You can determine the selected source by checking which lamp is lit-either the Roll Media lamp (a) or the
Cut Sheet lamp (b).
• Roll Media lamp : Selected when printing on Roll Media.
• Cut Sheet lamp : Selected when printing on Sheets.
Note
• If a sheet is loaded when you change the paper source to a roll, Eject sheet? is displayed. Press
the OK button and remove the sheet.
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• When the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.647)
• When the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing is nished.
• When a printer menu operation is in progress
Wait until the operation is nished before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of loading paper
Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of replacing Ink Tank
Finish replacing the Ink Tank before selecting the paper source.
• When the Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.
148 Handling Paper
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Note
• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on
the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer
will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104) Plain Paper is selected by
factory default.
If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you
must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.153)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 149
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Loading Sheets in the Printer
Note
• For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see “Paper Sizes” or the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.109) (→P.104)
• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover before loading paper. (→P.597)
• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load
the paper. (→P.76)
1.
If you send a print job from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the
Display Screen. Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
150 Handling Paper
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
2.
With a sheet lengthwise and printing-side up, insert it between the Platen (a) and the Paper
Retainer (b). Align the edges of the sheet as follows.
1. Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line (c) at right.
2. Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line (d), as shown.
When inserted, sheets are automatically held by suction against the Platen.
Important
• Load a sheet so that it is parallel to the Paper Alignment Line at right (c). Loading paper askew will
cause an error.
• Warped paper may rub against the Printhead. Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it.
Note
• You can adjust the strength of suction holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is up.
If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength. Set
suction stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three settings are available.
However, even if you increase the suction, it may not be sufcient to hold some types of paper
against the Platen well. In this case, use your hand to load the paper.
• Sheets are held in place by suction through holes on the Platen. Although the suction may produce
a noise when paper is loaded in some positions, it does not indicate a problem. If the noise is
distracting, try moving the paper over slightly to the left or right (up to 1 mm [0.039 in]) while keeping
it parallel to the Paper Alignment Line.
• The suction remains on for about 30 seconds during loading. If you cannot nish loading a sheet
during this time, pull the sheet away and reinsert it to start the suction again.
Handling Paper 151
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
3.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
The printer now starts feeding the paper.
After the paper is advanced, the printer automatically goes online and starts printing.
If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer automatically shows
a menu for selection of the type of paper on the Display Screen.
In this case, select the type of paper. (→P.149)
152 Handling Paper
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing
When printing on non-standard sizes of paper or to specify a particular position to start printing, in the printer
menu set Width Detection to Off for the paper used.
Setting Width Detection to Off will prevent paper from being automatically advanced to the position for printing. In
this case, manually load paper at the position for printing.
Instructions for manually loading paper at the position for printing when Width Detection is set to Off are
as follows.
1.
If you send a print job from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the
Display Screen. Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
Handling Paper 153
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
2.
Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the Paper Alignment
Line (a) on the right side of the printer, load the paper so that the near edge is aligned with
the groove (b) at the far end of the Platen.
In this case, advance the paper as far into the paper feed slot as possible because it will
be printed starting at that position.
3.
4.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
If no print job has been received from the computer, press ▲ or ▼ to select of the type of
paper loaded, and then press the OK button.
5.
When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼
to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.
6.
7.
Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.
Note
• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.
154 Handling Paper
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Removing Sheets
Remove sheets from the printer as follows.
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
Note
• Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during
the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, press the Stop button to cancel printing, print job
processing, or ink drying.
2.
Press the OK button to eject the paper.
The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.
3.
As you hold the sheet, lift the Release Lever and remove the sheet.
4.
Lower the Release Lever.
Handling Paper 155
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
156 Handling Paper
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
5.
Hold the paper and pull it out, toward the front.
Note
• If you do not nd any scraps or jams, see “Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found”.
(→P.615)
6.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
7.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
8.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
Handling Paper 157
Output Stacker
Output Stacker
Wheeled Output Stacker
An output stacker with casters, positioned in front of the printer.
a. Output Stacker
A cloth tray that catches ejected documents.
The Output Stacker can be opened and closed using the rod in front.
b. Output Stacker Ejection Guides
Prevent printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or being drawn into the Paper
Feed Slot.
Hold the Wheeled Output Stacker by these guides when moving it.
c. Output Stacker Foot Stand
Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.
d. Stopper
Locks the Stand casters.
Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked
may scratch the casters or the oor.
Note
• For instructions on assembling the Wheeled Output Stacker, see the setup guide provided with the
Wheeled Output Stacker.
158 Handling Paper
Output Stacker
Using the Wheeled Output Stacker
Positioning the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer will prevent rolls from dropping on the oor after printing.
The stacker is equipped with casters to facilitate moving it.
Important
• The Output Stacker can accommodate one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet
after it is printed.
Positioning the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer
1. Holding the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a), move the stacker between the printer Stand.
2. Lock the casters.
Handling Paper 159
Output Stacker
Removing the Wheeled Output Stacker from the printer
Note
• If there is not enough space to move the Wheeled Output Stacker, remove any printed documents inside
the Output Stacker and fold the Output Stacker up.
1. Release the caster lock.
2. Holding the Output Stacker Ejection Guides (a), move the stacker away from the printer.
160 Handling Paper
Printing Photos and Images
Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for photos and images
Print Target
Description
Highest Quality
Setting optimized for printing at the highest level
of quality.
Photo
Setting optimized for printing photographic
images from digital cameras.
Poster (Photos)
Settings optimized for printing posters mainly
composed of photos.
Poster (Text, Illustrations)
Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching
store posters combining images and text.
Scanned Image
Setting optimized for printing scanned images
with accurate color reproduction to match the
original images.
Draft
Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.
Working With Various Print Jobs 161
Printing Photos and Images
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.211)
For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.163)
• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.165)
162 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
In A Media Type, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated Paper,
and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The type of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel
) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
5.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (from digital camera) in the
E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Working With Various Print Jobs 163
Printing Photos and Images
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
8.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
9.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.370)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
164 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Working With Various Print Jobs 165
Printing Photos and Images
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The type of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel
) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
8.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images”. (→P.161)
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
166 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.418)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Working With Various Print Jobs 167
Printing Photos and Images
Printing Photos in Monochrome
Printing Photos in Monochrome
The following settings are available for monochrome printing.
Main
Advanced
Settings
Color Mode MonochromeDeactivates color printing so that images are
printed in monochrome, with continuous-tone color
data printed using gray midtones.
• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on
the Color Adjustment sheet.
• Because color ink is used to produce gray
continuous-tone images, the gray may appear
to have a tinge of color.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows) (→P.169)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X) (→P.171)
168 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Working With Various Print Jobs 169
Printing Photos and Images
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and other settings for monochrome printing on the Color
Adjustment sheet.
9.
10.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
170 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Working With Various Print Jobs 171
Printing Photos and Images
8.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9.
10.
Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.
11.
12.
Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and other settings on the Color Settings pane.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
172 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Photos and Images
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Working With Various Print Jobs 173
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise
drawings from CAD applications.
Note
• In Windows, you can print highly precise drawings using the provided imagePROGRAF HDI Driver for
AutoCAD/AutoCAD LT.
For details on the HDI driver, see HDI Driver .
For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.176)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.178)
Printing Line Drawings and Text
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print Target
Description
CAD (Line Drawing)
Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD
drawings clearly.
CAD (Fast)
Settings optimized for fast printing of CAD
drawings.
CAD (B/W Line Drawing)
Settings optimized to print black lines in CAD
drawings clearly.
CAD (High Accuracy)
Settings optimized for attractive printing of highly
precise documents such as CAD drawings with
smooth lines and small text.
174 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Print Target
Description
Poster (Notice Announcement)
Settings optimized for printing announcements
such as wall newspapers and other notices with
a large amount of text.
3D CAD, GIS
Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings,
perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS
maps.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. ( Advanced Settings )
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.211)
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.176)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.178)
Working With Various Print Jobs 175
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in.])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in.])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) or CAD
(Monochrome Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
176 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A3.
8.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
9.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.370)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Working With Various Print Jobs 177
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in.])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in.])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) or CAD
(Monochrome Line Drawing ) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
178 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Working With Various Print Jobs 179
Printing CAD Drawings
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.418)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
180 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings in Monochrome
The following settings are available for monochrome printing of line drawings such as CAD documents.
Main
Easy
Settings
Print
Target
CAD
Settings optimized for monochrome printing of line
(Monochrome drawings, such as CAD drawings. When you select
Line Drawing ) Easy Settings > Print Target > CAD (Monochrome
Line Drawing ), color is printed as shades of gray
using black ink, for monochrome printing.
• This mode may not be available for all types of
paper.
• Trace amounts of color ink are also used, to
enhance the paper adhesion of black ink.
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.176)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)
(→P.178)
Advanced
Settings
Color
Mode
Monochrome
(BK ink)
Monochrome printing, using black ink. Color
is printed in grayscale. Use this mode when
printing CAD drawings or similar line drawings in
monochrome.
• This mode may not be available for all types of
paper.
• Trace amounts of color ink are also used, to
enhance the paper adhesion of black ink.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Line Drawings (Windows) (→P.182)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Line Drawings (Mac OS X) (→P.184)
Monochrome
Bitmap
All colors except white are printed in black. Colors
are shown not in grayscale but solid black. Use
this mode to print documents with ne color lines
that might be difcult to distinguish unless printed
in black, or to print sharp black lines when making
copies of diazo prints.
• This mode may not be available for all types of
paper.
• Trace amounts of color ink are also used, to
enhance the paper adhesion of black ink.
Working With Various Print Jobs 181
Printing CAD Drawings
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Line
Drawings (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Note
• Monochrome (BK ink) may not be available for all types of paper.
182 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
9.
10.
Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and other settings on the Color Settings sheet pane.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Working With Various Print Jobs 183
Printing CAD Drawings
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Line
Drawings (Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
184 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
8.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9.
Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.
Note
• Monochrome may not be available for all types of paper.
10.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
11.
12.
Adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and other settings on the Color Settings pane.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Working With Various Print Jobs 185
Printing CAD Drawings
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
186 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.
Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.
Note
• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print
Priority to Line Drawing/Text.
Color Compatibility
Color Setting Item
Color Setting
Description
Color (CAD) 1
Print in standard colors.
Color (CAD) 2
Print in brighter colors.
Color (CAD) 3
Print emulating the Canon BJ-W3000/W3050, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers.
Color (CAD) 4
Print emulating the HP Designjet 500/800, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers.
Color (CAD) 5
Print emulating the HP Designjet 1000, in colors
resembling colors produced by this printer.
Color (CAD) 6
Print emulating the HP Designjet 4000/4500, in colors
resembling colors produced by these printers.
Important
• If you have selected Color (CAD) 3, Color (CAD) 4, Color (CAD) 5, or Color (CAD) 6, it is not possible
to match the colors and image quality produced by the specied printer exactly.
For instructions on conguring Color Compatibility, refer to the following topics.
• Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) (→P.188)
Working With Various Print Jobs 187
Printing CAD Drawings
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)
You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.
Note
• Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print
Priority to Line Drawing/Text.
1.
2.
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
3.
Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device Settings sheet.
4.
Click A Color Compatibility to display the Color Compatibility dialog box.
Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.
188 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing CAD Drawings
5.
Select the desired color settings in the A Color Compatibility list.
Note
• For details on color settings, see “Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings”. (→P.187)
For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.215)
Working With Various Print Jobs 189
Printing CAD Drawings
HP-GL/2 Printing
This printer supports the GARO language as well as HP-GL/2 and HP RTL (*1) emulation. *2) When printing
from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in the application’s plotter output settings.
Note
• For instructions on conguring these settings, refer to the software documentation.
The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing when GARO, HP-GL/2, or HP RTL jobs
are received. Congure the settings especially for HP-GL/2 emulation on the printer control panel. (→P.53)
This printer can emulate the following printers.
Emulated Printers
Canon
W3000 and W3050 (*3)
Hewlett-Packard
Designjet 450c, Designjet 750c Plus, and Designjet 750c
*1: HP-GL/2 : Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language 2; HP RTL: Hewlett-Packard Raster Transfer Language
*2: It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly.
*3: Layout templates are not supported.
190 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for ofce documents
Print Target
Ofce Document
Description
Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce
documents such as handouts.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.211)
For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.192)
• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.194)
Working With Various Print Jobs 191
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Mainsheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
192 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Ofce Documents
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setupsheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Select sheets in the L Paper Source list.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.370)
10.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Working With Various Print Jobs 193
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in.])/Letter
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Cut Sheet.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
194 Working With Various Print Jobs
Printing Ofce Documents
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Select sheets in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.418)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Working With Various Print Jobs 195
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the
following topic.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.196)
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.199)
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
196 Working With Various Print Jobs
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.383)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Working With Various Print Jobs 197
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
198 Working With Various Print Jobs
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
To display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app icon after navigating to Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF in the Applications folder or click C Set in the Utility pane.
2.
In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
Working With Various Print Jobs 199
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
200 Working With Various Print Jobs
Adjusting Images
Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings
for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.
Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.
Description
Color Mode
Color Adjustment
Color
Print in color.
You can adjust the color balance and
color-matching method.
Monochrome
Print in grayscale.
You can adjust the color balance.
Color (CAD)
A color mode optimized for line drawings You can adjust the color balance.
(2D-CAD). Lines in red, yellow, and other
colors are printed especially clearly.
Color (CAD) enables adjustment of color
settings. (→P.187)
Monochrome (BK
ink)
A color mode for printing line drawings.
Only Black ink is used.
Monochrome Bitmap Print in a color mode for CAD, using
Color Ink, with all non-white portions
printed in black.
You can adjust the color balance.
No color adjustment is supported.
Enhanced Printing Options 201
Adjusting Images
Color Adjustment
You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.
Adjustment Item
Cyan
Magenta
Description
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan,
Magenta, and Yellow.
Yellow
Gray Tone
Adjust gray tones to suit the images of monochrome
photos. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure
black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so
on. Select the color tone in the color region or from
the list.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping
the darkest and lightest portions intact.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
202 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Matching
You can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of
on-screen images more closely.
Matching Mode
Description
Notes
Driver Matching Mode
Color adjustment based on the
original color prole of the printer
driver
This is the default color-matching
method. Normally, use Driver
Matching Mode.
ICC Matching Mode
Color adjustment based on ICC
color proles (an international
standard) using the printer driver
You can select the printer prole in
the Printer Prole Settings list.
Driver ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the
standard Windows ICM function.
The printer driver adjusts the
colors.
Available when using Windows
2000, Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003, Windows Vista, or
Windows Server 2008.
Host ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the
standard Windows ICM function.
Windows adjusts the colors.
ColorSync
Color adjustment based on the
standard Mac OS ColorSync
function. Mac OS adjusts the
colors.
Available when using Mac OS X
10.2.8-10.4.
Off (No Correction)
No color-matching
Choose this option for
color-matching by the software
application or with your own color
prole, when you want to disable
color-matching by the printer driver.
Matching Method
Description
Auto
Color-matching optimized for
images, graphics, or text
Perceptual
Color-matching optimized for
photos. Print images with smooth
gradations and colors closer to
those as displayed on the screen.
Colorimetric
Color-matching with adjustment
to remove color from white area.
Colors in data are reproduced
accurately.
Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr)
Color-matching without white
adjustment to reect the prole of
original data. Colors in data are
reproduced accurately. Without
white adjustment, colors are added
to white areas.
Saturation
Color-matching optimized for
graphics. This option emphasizes
color saturation.
Notes
The available options and their
display order vary depending on
your selection in Color-Matching
Mode, as well as the operating
system.
Enhanced Printing Options 203
Adjusting Images
Note
• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors
are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor
calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.
For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.205)
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.208)
204 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Enhanced Printing Options 205
Adjusting Images
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
D Cyan
E Magenta
Description
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of
Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
F Yellow
9.
G Gray Tone
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
H Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
J Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
206 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 207
Adjusting Images
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
208 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 209
Adjusting Images
11.
On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
D Cyan
E Magenta
Description
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of
Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
H Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
J Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
210 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing
You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.
Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and
colors to prioritize for printing.
Note
• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose
the printing application.
For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Photos and Images (→P.161)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.174)
• Printing Ofce Documents (→P.191)
Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Print Priority (*1)
Description
Image
A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for
emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.
Line Drawing/Text
Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall
newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing
detailed text in printed documents.
However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that
require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.
Ofce Document
Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics,
such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.
*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.
Enhanced Printing Options 211
Adjusting Images
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality (*1)
Description
Print Priority
Highest
A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is
most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more
ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing
quality.
Image
High
Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is
most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in
“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional
printing quality.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
Standard
Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality Image
and speed are both important.
Line Drawing/Text
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Ofce Document
Draft
Choose this setting to print faster.
Image
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when Line Drawing/Text
checking layouts.
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.
212 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Color settings
Setting Item
Description
Options
Color Mode (*1)
Color
Monochrome
Color (CAD)
Monochrome (BK ink)
Monochrome Bitmap
Choose whether to print in color or
monochrome.
(→P.201)
Color Adjustment
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Gray Tone
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
You can adjust the levels of cyan,
magenta, and yellow as well as the
brightness, contrast, saturation,
and gray tones.
If you choose Monochrome
or Monochrome (BK ink) in
Color Mode only Brightness and
Contrast can be adjusted.
Image, Graphics, and Text are
available as Object Adjustment
options. (In Windows and Mac OS
X 10.5 only.)
Color-Matching Modes
Driver Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
Driver ICM Mode
Host ICM Mode
Off
Choose the color-matching mode.
Other color-matching modes may
be provided by the computer
operating system, such as ICM
and ColorSync.
Color-Matching Method (*2)
Auto
Perceptual
Colorimetric
Saturation
other
Choose the color-matching
method. The available options
vary depending on your selection
in “Color-Matching Mode.”
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
Enhanced Printing Options 213
Adjusting Images
Enhancing printing quality
Setting Item
Description
Unidirectional Printing
Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing
results if lines are printed crooked or images are
uneven. However, this takes more time than regular
printing.
Thicken Fine Lines (Windows)
Thicken Fine Lines (Mac OS X)
Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD
drawings or similar documents.
Sharpen Text (*1)
Choose this option to print intricate text more
distinctly.
Reduce Print Unevenness (*2)
Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.
Economy Printing
When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed
than in regular printing, but the quality is diminished.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when
checking drawings, for example. Depending on the
Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode
may not be available.
*1: Displayed in Windows and Mac OS X 10.5.
*2: Displayed in Mac OS X.
Note
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
• For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following
topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.215)
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.217)
214 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic
describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click High (1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
Enhanced Printing Options 215
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
Click Color (CAD) in the G Color Mode list.
To adjust the color, click H Color Settings.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting color, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
10.
11.
Select the K Sharpen Text check box.
12.
13.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
216 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic
describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 217
Adjusting Images
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.
Click High(1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11.
12.
Click Color (CAD) in the H Color Mode list.
To adjust the color, click I Set.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting color, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
218 Enhanced Printing Options
Adjusting Images
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 219
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing Paper for Printing
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.
Media type
The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. For information about the Media Conguration
Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer
driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions,
the printing results may not be suitable.
If the paper type is not listed for selection
If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proong paper as a special
paper (Special 1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other
types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Note that higher
numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.
For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.
• Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.113)
• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.149)
220 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Important
• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.
(→P.552)
(→P.551)
Note
• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on
the Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic
monitoring of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic monitoring of the remaining
roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.114)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll1(Uppr) Type or Roll2 (Lwr) Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104) By default, Plain Paper
is selected.
• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect printing quality.
• If automatic monitoring of the remaining roll is deactivated ( Off is selected) and you have selected a
type of paper for which width detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must advance the paper
manually to the position for printing. (→P.153)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Enhanced Printing Options 221
Choosing Paper for Printing
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Note
• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on
the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer
will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104) Plain Paper is selected by
factory default.
If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you
must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.153)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
222 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.
For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.224)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.226)
Enhanced Printing Options 223
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
224 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
8.
If you have selected Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2 in L Paper Source,
select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.370)
Enhanced Printing Options 225
Choosing Paper for Printing
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
226 Enhanced Printing Options
Choosing Paper for Printing
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Cut Sheet in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page
Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or
Roll Paper 2 in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll
Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.418)
Enhanced Printing Options 227
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.229)
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.231)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
228 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 229
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
8.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click D Fit Paper Size.
Click ISO A3 in the G Paper Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
230 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 231
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
232 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Make sure E Fit Paper Size is selected.
Click ISO A3 in the I Paper Size list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 233
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.235)
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.237)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
234 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
Enhanced Printing Options 235
Printing enlargements or reductions
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
9.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
10.
Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.
Note
• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of
the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.
• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
236 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 237
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
238 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 239
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.
For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.241)
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.243)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
240 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 241
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
8.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
10.
11.
12.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click ISO A4 in the G Paper Size list.
Click F Scaling and enter “120”.
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting G Print Centered
on the Layout sheet.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
242 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS
X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 243
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
244 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click G Scaling and enter “120.”
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed
in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered
check box.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 245
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the
following topic.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.247)
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.249)
246 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.383)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
Enhanced Printing Options 247
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy .
248 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
To display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app icon after navigating to Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF in the Applications folder or click C Set in the Utility pane.
2.
In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
Enhanced Printing Options 249
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
250 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Printing at full size
Printing on Oversized Paper
Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the
space for a margin. (→P.85) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size,
use an oversized paper size.
For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and
cut away the excess margin.
Note
• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image
near the edge will not be printed.
Oversize
The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when
printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.
a.
Regular paper size: Gray area not printed
b.
Page Size
c.
Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)
Important
• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin
required by the printer.
• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size
• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size
• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized
printing. (→P.109)
Enhanced Printing Options 251
Printing at full size
Note
• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized
printing on sheets, choose Cut Sheet as the paper source.
• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and
print on it.
• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper
Size. Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size.” (→P.297)
For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.253)
• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.255)
252 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4/Letter (210.0×297.0 mm) (8.3×11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
7.
8.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 253
Printing at full size
9.
10.
Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Note
• You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected
Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format
Oversize - xxxxxx.
254 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.
Note
• For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize”.
4.
5.
6.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 255
Printing at full size
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
256 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
12.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 257
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed
document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (→P.629)
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
258 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.260)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.262)
Enhanced Printing Options 259
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in.) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10×12 in.)-that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2×12.2 in.).
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
260 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
9.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 261
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
262 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing at full size
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
11.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
12.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 263
Printing at full size
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
264 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed
document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (→P.629)
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 265
Borderless Printing
Fit Paper Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
Note
• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on
each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer
to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.267)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.269)
266 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 267
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
9.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
15.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Paper Size.
Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
268 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 269
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
11.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
12.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
270 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
Click E Fit Paper Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
In I Paper Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 271
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed
document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (→P.629)
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
272 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Scale to t Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.
Note
• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width
(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width,
refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.274)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.276)
Enhanced Printing Options 273
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
274 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
9.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 275
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
276 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
11.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
12.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 277
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced
Printing.
16.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
278 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed
document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
• Before borderless printing, make sure the blue Switch on the platen is set toward the ● side. (→P.629)
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 279
Borderless Printing
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.281)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.283)
280 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in.) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10×12 in.)-that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2×12.2 in.).
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 281
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
9.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
282 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 283
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
11.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
12.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
284 Enhanced Printing Options
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 285
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing banners or at other non-standard
sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing)
You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.
Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width
of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.
Note
• To create an original for large-format printing in the Windows version of Microsoft Word, you can use
the imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Word and follow simple instructions in the form of a wizard to
prepare and print your original.
For details, see Print Plug-In for Word.
286 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Fit Roll Paper Width
You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the
full width of rolls.
Note
• The printer supports roll printing up to a maximum length of 18.0 m (19.7 yd).
For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.288)
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.293)
Important
• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the
remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
Enhanced Printing Options 287
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Windows)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word
Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Register a Custom Paper Size.
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Paper Size. In this example, 100×500
mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
2. In the application, create an original in the size you registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Registering a Custom Paper Size
This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in
either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.383)
3.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
4.
5.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used
in this example.
6.
7.
8.
9.
In Units, click mm.
Under Paper Size, enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height.
Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
288 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
10.
Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not
available after you exit the application.
For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.298)
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.
1.
2.
3.
Start Microsoft Word.
Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
Under Paper Size, click the Custom Paper Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this
example.
Important
• If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper
sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in).
4.
5.
Set the printing orientation to horizontal.
Create the banner.
Note
• To create an original for large-format printing in Microsoft Word, you can use the imagePROGRAF Print
Plug-In for Word and follow simple instructions in the form of a wizard to prepare and print your original.
For details, see Print Plug-In for Word.
Enhanced Printing Options 289
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the
E Print Target list.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner."
290 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
9.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
11.
After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll
(406.4mm), and then click OK.
Enhanced Printing Options 291
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Note
• If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.
1. On the Layout sheet, click M Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.
2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.
292 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in.])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.
2. Register a “Custom Page Size.”
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup. In this
example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
Enhanced Printing Options 293
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Register a Custom Page Size
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable
for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Create the document in the application.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
5.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want
to register. Here, enter “100*500.”
If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.
6.
Under Page Size, enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height. Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
7.
Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins. Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
8.
9.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500," the size
you registered.
10.
11.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
294 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
Enhanced Printing Options 295
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
8.
9.
10.
11.
In C Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
296 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.
Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver
After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose
them anytime as needed.
Note
• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Paper Sizes in
Windows and “Custom Sizes” in Mac OS X.
Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use
Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you
exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we
recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.
Note
• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.
For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.298)
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.302)
Enhanced Printing Options 297
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as described below.
• Printing by using Custom Size (→P.298)
• Printing by using Custom Paper Size (→P.300)
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the printer.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
298 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
1. Select mm in Units.
2. Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
11.
12.
Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 299
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing by using Custom Paper Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example. First, register
a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Paper Size.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the printer.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
300 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
Click O Paper Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.
9.
Complete the following settings in the Paper Size Options dialog box.
1. Enter a desired paper name in C Custom Paper Size Name. “430 mm Square” is used in this
example.
2. Conrm that mm is selected in D Units.
3. Under E Paper Size, enter “430” in both Width and Height.
Note
• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either
Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.
10.
11.
12.
Click F Add to register “430 mm Square”.
Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.
Make sure the Custom Paper Size Name you specied in Page Setup > A Page Size is
selected-in this case, "430 mm Square."
13.
14.
Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 301
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you
will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
3.
Create the document in the application.
4.
5.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
6.
In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and
Width.
7.
In Printer Margins, enter “0.5” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.
Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.
8.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the
paper name-in this case, “430*430”.
9.
10.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size
you registered.
11.
12.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
302 Enhanced Printing Options
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
13.
Access the Main pane.
14.
15.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
16.
Access the Page Setup pane.
17.
18.
19.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.
In D Easy Settings, make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 303
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to
each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand
meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.
Free Layout (Windows)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
304 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.306)
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.308)
Enhanced Printing Options 305
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5.
6.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Free Layout in the B Page Layout list.
306 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this
point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout
help topic.
9.
Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
Enhanced Printing Options 307
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before
printing.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout.
308 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
4.
Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange
originals from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free
Layout help topic.
5.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout .
Enhanced Printing Options 309
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Roll paper (banner)
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.311)
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.313)
310 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
Enhanced Printing Options 311
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
Select the B Banner Printing check box.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
312 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 313
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click Roll Paper 1 (Banner) or Roll Paper 2 (Banner).
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
314 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original
and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.
Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Note
• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.
Important
• This function cannot be combined with the following options.
• Borderless Printing
• Resizing to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
• Scaling Originals (Windows)
• Banner Printing (Windows)
For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.316)
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.318)
Enhanced Printing Options 315
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
316 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page
Layout Printing dialog box by clicking C Set.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 317
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
Click 4.0 in the A Pages per Sheet list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Layout pane.
Note
• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout
Direction and C Border.
318 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
11.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
12.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
Enhanced Printing Options 319
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
13.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
14.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
320 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Posters in Sections
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you
can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.
Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.322)
Note
• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.
Enhanced Printing Options 321
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge
an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Poster
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual )
Paper Type: Glossy Paper
Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Poster (Photos) or Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
322 Enhanced Printing Options
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A2.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click Poster (2 x 2) in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
1. Click C Set under B Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
2. On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
3. Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 323
Centering originals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
When using originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.325)
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.327)
324 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, click ISO A4.
Enhanced Printing Options 325
Centering originals
8.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
9.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
326 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 327
Centering originals
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
10-in. Roll.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
328 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 329
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
When you print originals that are smaller than the sheet size, the originals are arranged in the upper left corner
of the sheet. If you prefer, you can print originals that were arranged this way centered on the sheet instead.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.331)
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.333)
330 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Enhanced Printing Options 331
Centering originals
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.
13.
14.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Click F Scaling and enter “50.”
Click Cut Sheet in the L Paper Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
332 Enhanced Printing Options
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4/Letter
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Non-standard
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
6.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application software menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 333
Centering originals
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Paper Source list.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
11.
12.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
334 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts
within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.
Important
• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll
Paper Width to print rotated pages.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.336)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.338)
Enhanced Printing Options 335
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in]) /Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper Width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t
within the width of an A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm), which enables you to conserve paper.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, click ISO A4.
336 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
7.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
8.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 337
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t
within the width of an A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm), which enables you to conserve paper.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
338 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
8.
Access the Page Setup pane.
9.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 339
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
340 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in
originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.
Important
• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
• Banner printing
• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout
Note
• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents,
depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.342)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.344)
Enhanced Printing Options 341
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, click ISO A4.
7.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
342 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
8.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
11.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the I No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 343
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in.])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
344 Enhanced Printing Options
Conserving roll paper
8.
Access the Page Setup pane.
9.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 345
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
346 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
You can check the print layout on the preview screen.
Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
Note
• Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.
Enhanced Printing Options 347
Checking Images Before Printing
Preview (Macintosh)
While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be
instantly applied on the preview screen.
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) (→P.349)
• Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.352)
348 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After you click OK, when you print a job, either the imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer
window will be displayed, depending on your environment.
Enhanced Printing Options 349
Checking Images Before Printing
imagePROGRAF Preview
1.
2.
3.
The main imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
350 Enhanced Printing Options
Checking Images Before Printing
PageComposer
1.
The PageComposer window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
2.
In the PageComposer editing window, select the document to print and open the Print Preview
window.
3.
4.
After conrming that the layout is just as you expected, close the Print Preview window.
In the PageComposer editing window, make sure the document to print is selected. Choose
Print in the File menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 351
Checking Images Before Printing
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
4.
5.
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
352 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Other useful settings
Printing With Watermarks
You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.
Watermark
Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.
The following watermarks are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT
FILE COPY
FINAL
PRELIMINARY
PROOF
TOP SECRET
You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame,
if desired.
• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the
document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.
Note
• Watermarks are supported in Windows.
• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.
For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.354)
Enhanced Printing Options 353
Other useful settings
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on
(Windows)
This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a “FILE COPY”
watermark.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5×23.4 in.])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in.])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
354 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this
case, click ISO A2.
8.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
9.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the D Watermark check box.
Click FILE COPY in the E Watermarks list.
Note
• To create your own, original watermark, click F Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for
instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Enhanced Printing Options 355
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation
You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape
orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.
Rotate 180 degrees
The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.
Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.
For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.357)
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.359)
356 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in]) /Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in.])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 357
Other useful settings
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
8.
9.
In H Orientation, click J Landscape.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
10.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
358 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm [8.3×11.7 in])/Letter
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in.])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
8.
9.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 359
Other useful settings
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
11.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
12.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
360 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 361
Other useful settings
Using Favorites
You can register print settings as Favorites to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations,
or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.
Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing,
and you can check the settings details.
Note
• You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the
same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)
For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.363)
• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.365)
362 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (Windows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
6.
Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.
7.
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Complete the print settings.
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.
Enhanced Printing Options 363
Other useful settings
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.
5.
6.
Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
364 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
Enhanced Printing Options 365
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of
paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.104)
Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the
roll, or you can print a cut line.
For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.367)
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.368)
366 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as
how to print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the L Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
case, choose from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
5.
Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
6.
To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the
paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
7.
8.
Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.
Enhanced Printing Options 367
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as
how to print a cut line for manual cutting.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or to select the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Paper Source list, click to select the feed method set for the specied paper. In this
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Page Setup pane.
case, select from Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2.
368 Enhanced Printing Options
Other useful settings
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
11.
To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer
Click C Set to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the
printer Control Panel.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.421)
Enhanced Printing Options 369
Printer Driver
Windows Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)
For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.381)
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.383)
For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.385)
You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings.
Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced
Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.389)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.390)
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.391)
Matching Sheet (Windows) (→P.393)
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.395)
• Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.397)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.
• Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.399)
• Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.400)
You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing
options.
• Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.402)
• Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.403)
• Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.404)
Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added
can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.
370 Windows Software
Printer Driver
• Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.406)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.407)
You can view support information and the user manual.
• Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.408)
You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.
imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a
single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout .
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Windows Software 371
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
372 Windows Software
Printer Driver
8.
If you have selected Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll Paper 2 in L Paper Source,
select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.370)
Windows Software 373
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (Windows)
There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.374)
• Checking a print preview (→P.375)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By
checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size,
orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Top illustrations
Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing
selection, color mode, and other settings information.
Middle, bordered area
The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement
or reduction are displayed.
Bottom illustrations
Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing
selection, and other settings information.
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View Settings on the Main sheet to
display the View Settings dialog box.
374 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, PageComposer is launched before printing. Conrming how documents will
be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.347)
Windows Software 375
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After you click OK, when you print a job, either the imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer
window will be displayed, depending on your environment.
376 Windows Software
Printer Driver
imagePROGRAF Preview
1.
2.
3.
The main imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.
To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview .
Windows Software 377
Printer Driver
PageComposer
1.
The PageComposer window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
2.
In the PageComposer editing window, select the document to print and open the Print Preview
window.
3.
4.
After conrming that the layout is just as you expected, close the Print Preview window.
In the PageComposer editing window, make sure the document to print is selected. Choose
Print in the File menu.
378 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (Windows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
6.
Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.
7.
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Complete the print settings.
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.
Windows Software 379
Printer Driver
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.
5.
6.
Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.374)
380 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)
1.
2.
Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some
cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.
■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Note
• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these
six sheets may be displayed.
Windows Software 381
Printer Driver
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.383)
382 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)
1.
2.
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
3.
Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the
Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.
name of this printer.
Note
• The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (→P.408)
Windows Software 383
Printer Driver
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.381)
384 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Main Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
Note
• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing
application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
B Get Information
Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows
the types and sizes of paper specied on the printer for each feed source.
When you select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver
settings for the feed source, type of paper, and roll width.
C Advanced Settings
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Target
F View Settings
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (→P.161)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.174)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.191)
Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may
not be available.
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target.
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to check on-screen previews of documents before
Job Starts
printing.
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.347)
Windows Software 385
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to conrm
the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help le.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
B Get Information
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows
the types and sizes of paper specied on the printer for each feed source.
When you select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver
settings for the feed source, type of paper, and roll width.
C Advanced Settings Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
G Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
Depending on the Media Type setting, some Color Mode options may
not be available.
H Color Settings
386 Windows Software
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.201)
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
I Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
K Sharpen Text
Activate this option to print text more sharply.
T Economy Printing
When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing,
but the quality is diminished.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for
example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this
mode may not be available.
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to check on-screen previews of documents before
Job Starts
printing.
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (→P.347)
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which enables you to conrm
the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help le.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Windows Software 387
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by
Media Type. (→P.385)
Setting Item
A Paper Source
388 Windows Software
Description
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as information
about the loaded paper. To update the Paper Source and media type
settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and
click OK.
Printer Driver
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media
Type. (→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.137)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
Windows Software 389
Printer Driver
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target.
(→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the
selected Print Target.
390 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
Windows Software 391
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as
photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines
and circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
392 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Matching Sheet (Windows)
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices.
Driver Matching Mode
The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the Matching Mode list.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on
ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM
Mode, depending on your color matching system. If you prefer not to use
the printer driver for color matching, select No.
B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
Windows Software 393
Printer Driver
ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver
ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode on the Matching Mode sheet.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Input Prole Settings
You can select Image, Graphics, or Text. You can choose Matching
Method and Input Prole.
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.
To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text, select
Use the Same Prole for All Objects. To apply separate input proles
to Graphics and Text, clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and
specify the individual settings.
C Printer Prole Settings
Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
394 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)
On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.385)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Not available.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Not available.
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Not available.
K Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Windows Software 395
Printer Driver
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
396 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help le.
Setting Item
Description
A Page Size
Select the page size as specied in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.109)
B Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll
Paper 2 is selected in the L Paper Source list. Choose from the following
options when this setting is activated.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.265)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.272)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.258)
D Fit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Scale to t Roll Paper Scales the document image to match the roll width.
Width
F Print Image with
Actual Size
Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you
have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either the length
or width of the document from the A Page Size list.
G Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Available when Fit Paper For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.109)
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.
Size is selected.
C Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.228)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.234)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.240)
D Fit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
F Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
G Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.109)
Windows Software 397
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
H Orientation
Choose the printing orientation.
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P.356)
K Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before
printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.335)
(Conserve Paper)
L Paper Source
Choose the feed source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type
on the Main sheet.
M Roll Paper Width
Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.109)
N Roll Paper Options
Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper
Options dialog box.
Under A Automatic Cutting, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut
Guideline.
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.366)
Select B Banner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (→P.310)
P Output Method
Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to
complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings.
O Paper Size Options
Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to
register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.
S Defaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
398 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)
In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes
you dene are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.
Note
• To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options.
(→P.397)
Setting Item
Description
A Paper Size List
Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer
driver.
B Delete
Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the Paper Size
List, as needed.
However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
• If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.
• If an oversized paper size is selected.
• If a paper size in a red box is selected.
C Custom Paper Size Name
You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.
D Units
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height
and width.
E Paper Size
Specify the desired Width and Height. You can make your selection
from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting
Borderless Printing Size. To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and
Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to
Height.
F Add
Enables you to register the custom paper size you have specied or
overwrite an existing custom paper size.
G Display Series
You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size, Paper Size, and
Paper Size List.
Windows Software 399
Printer Driver
Layout Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
Setting Item
A Page Layout
C Set
D Watermark
Description
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.315)
Printing Posters in Sections (→P.321)
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.304)
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.412)
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection
in A Page Layout. In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and
which pages to print, as well as other settings.
• Page Layout Printing
• Pages to Print
• Free Layout Settings
Activating this option makes two settings available, E Watermarks and F
Edit Watermark.
Printing With Watermarks (→P.353)
E Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
F Edit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original
watermark.
G Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.324)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.330)
H Rotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.
I No Spaces at Top or
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and
below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
(→P.341)
Bottom (Conserve Paper)
J Copies
Reverse Order
400 Windows Software
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Page Options
Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete
settings for printing the user name, date, or page number in the header or
footer.
M Special Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how
printing is processed.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Windows Software 401
Printer Driver
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)
The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.
Note
• To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options. (→P.400)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Date
Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select
B Print Time Also.
C Print User Name
Select where the user name is printed, as desired.
D Print Page Number
Select where the page number is printed, as desired.
E Format Settings
Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to
complete format-related settings.
Note
• If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order:
date, user name, and page number.
• When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items
will be printed for each page.
402 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special
Settings dialog box.
Note
• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings. (→P.400)
Setting Item
A FineZoom Settings
Description
This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto. If
documents are not printed correctly on large-format paper, it may help to
select Yes, and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when
printed, it may help to select No.
B Application Color Matching You can give applications priority in color management.
Priority
C Enable Preview Switching
Selecting this option will start PageComposer if you print when Open
Preview When Print Job Starts is selected on the Main sheet.
D Fast Graphic Process
If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed
in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected
results.
E Reduce Print Unevenness
If you are concerned about uneven colors, selecting this option may
improve printing results. However, printing may take longer for some
images.
F Adjust faint lines
If ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other
shapes, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.
However, lines in some colors may appear broken.
Windows Software 403
Printer Driver
Favorites Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Favorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings
favorites.
Using Favorites (→P.362)
B Settings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.
C Comment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.
D Apply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite
selected in the A Favorites.
E Application Settings Priority
Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source
application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A
Favorites, when clicking D Apply Favorite. For details on the settings
items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.
F Delete
Click to delete the selected favorite from the A Favorites list.
G Edit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the
name and icon for the favorite selected in the A Favorites list.
H Add
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the
current print settings as a favorite.
I Import
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import
favorite settings saved as a le.
J Export
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the
favorite settings as a le.
404 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
K Up
Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.
L Down
Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.
Windows Software 405
Printer Driver
Utility Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Utilitysheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant
utility help.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Maintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which offers the
following maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B Color imageRUNNER
Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (*1) (iR
enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER
(Windows) (→P.196)
Enlargement Copy
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
406 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Support Sheet (Windows)
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the
latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s
manual to be installed on your computer.
C Settings Summaries
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.
Windows Software 407
Printer Driver
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)
Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the
Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Color Compatibility
Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to
adjust colors if you have selected Color Mode > Color (CAD).
B About
Displays version information for the printer driver.
408 Windows Software
Printer Driver
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)
The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout,
and Favorites sheets.
Button
A Copy
Corresponding Utility
Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste
the settings information into a le created with a text editor or similar
application.
Windows Software 409
Status Monitor
Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and
“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.
• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers
connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.
• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
• Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning
message will notify you when ink levels are low.
• The type of paper loaded in each paper source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has
run out.
• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance
for optimal printing results.
• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
410 Windows Software
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image
les on your computer with various other applications.
• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.
• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you
manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.
• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image
for retouching and click Image Adjustment.
• Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it
can save time and work in retouching.
Note
• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.
Windows Software 411
PosterArtist
PosterArtist
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots
from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
Edit Using PosterArtist
PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and
compose an original with them.
Important
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:
• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.413)
412 Windows Software
PosterArtist
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster
layout for printing.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5.
6.
7.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.381)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the B Page Layout list.
When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At
this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.
Windows Software 413
PosterArtist
9.
Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple
applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.
10.
Print from the PosterArtist menu.
414 Windows Software
Device Setup Utility
Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and
your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.
• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this
list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure
the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.
• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication
between your computer and these printers is possible.
Note
• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.
Windows Software 415
Device Setup Utility
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
416 Windows Software
Device Setup Utility
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.416)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the Product Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
Windows Software 417
Printer Driver
Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.425)
For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.426)
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose
Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings
to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.430)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.431)
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P.432)
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.434)
• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.435)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.
• Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.437)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.438)
You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.
• Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.439)
You can view support information and the user’s manual.
With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications
on a single page before printing. For details, see Free Layout .
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or
size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see Preview .
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
418 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Mac OS X Software 419
Printer Driver
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Cut Sheet in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page
Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or
Roll Paper 2 in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll
Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.418)
420 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)
There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.421)
• Checking a print preview (→P.422)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional
Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings
for the page size, orientation, paper source, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Pane displayed when the H Images tab
is clicked
On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the
paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection,
color mode, and other settings information.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and
percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the I Size tab is
clicked
Paper size details are indicated numerically.
Pane with printer and paper illustrations
Illustrations indicate the feed source, orientation, borderless
printing selection, and other settings information.
Mac OS X Software 421
Printer Driver
Note
• To check the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View set. on the Main pane to display
the View settings dialog box.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing”. (→P.347)
422 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac
OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
4.
5.
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
Mac OS X Software 423
Printer Driver
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
424 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X)
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
Mac OS X Software 425
Printer Driver
Main Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help le.
Note
• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing
application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows the types of
paper specied on the printer for each feed source. When you select a
feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
feed source and type of paper.
C Set
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Target
F View set.
L Printer
426 Mac OS X Software
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (→P.161)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (→P.174)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.191)
Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target.
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
Printer Driver
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Using Mac OS X 10.5
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the type of paper.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
B Get Information
Click to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, which shows
the types of paper specied on the printer for each feed source. When you
select a feed source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings
for the feed source and type of paper.
C Set
Click to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the type of paper.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
H Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.211)
Mac OS X Software 427
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
N Input Bit Depth
Choose the levels of gradation in print data, either 8-bit or 16-bit. Optimal
results when printing data with rich gradation are possible by choosing
16-bit. For example, this option is particularly suited to printing images
created after specifying 16 bits per channel in Photoshop.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
O Fast Graphic Process
Select this option to print faster than usual, when possible.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
I Set
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.201)
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
M Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
P Sharpen Text
Activate this option to print text more sharply.
(Only supported in Mac OS X 10.5)
K Reduce Print Unevenness Choose this option to counteract uneven printing.
N Economy Printing
When this mode is selected, less ink is consumed than in regular printing,
but the quality is diminished.
Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for
example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this
mode may not be available.
L Printer
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
428 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver media type setting.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by
Media Type. (→P.426)
Setting Item
A Paper Source
Description
Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of
paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select
the desired Paper Source option and click OK.
Mac OS X Software 429
Printer Driver
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Settings by Media
Type. (→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.104)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.137)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen.
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, specify Yes, No, or Print Cut Guideline.
J Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
430 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click View Settings by Print Target.
(→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in
the Print Target list.
Mac OS X Software 431
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.
However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.
Color Adjustment pane: color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in
Advanced Settings. (→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged
with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original
graphic as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors
more subdued.
432 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance
of colors on various devices.
Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced
Settings, and then click Matching. (→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Matching Method
Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
Mac OS X Software 433
Printer Driver
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings.
(→P.426)
Setting Item
Description
A Sample Type
Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or
Graphics.
B View Color Pattern
Clicking to select this check box will display the color pattern.
C Apply to Sample
Clicking to select this check box will apply the revised settings to the
sample image.
D Cyan
Not available.
E Magenta
F Yellow
G Gray Tone
H Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original
graphic as it appears on the computer screen).
I Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
J Saturation
Not available.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.201)
434 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help le.
Setting Item
Description
A Paper Source
Choose the feed source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media
Type in the Main pane.
B Roll Paper Width
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is
displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.
C Page Size
Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the
application.
For details on paper sizes available from the source application, see “Paper
Sizes”. (→P.109)
D Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.228)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.234)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.240)
E Fit Paper Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
F Fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
G Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
H Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper (Auto), Roll Paper 1, or Roll
Paper 2 is selected in the A Paper Source list.
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width
of the paper.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.265)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.272)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.258)
I Paper Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Click Display all selections for Paper Size to list available sizes.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.109)
Mac OS X Software 435
Printer Driver
Setting Item
Description
J Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.324)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.330)
K No Spaces at Top or
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above
and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve
the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom
Margins (→P.341)
Bottom
L Rotate Page 90 degrees
436 Mac OS X Software
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before
printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.335)
Printer Driver
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Utilitypane.
Setting Item
Description
A Set
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following
maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B View
Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, which enables you to view
the status of print jobs.
C Set
Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
(iR enlargement copy).
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy .
Mac OS X Software 437
Printer Driver
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.
Setting Item
Description
A Data Send Method
Choose how print data is sent to the printer.
• B Send Print Data Immediately to Printer
• C Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer
D Send job to
Click to display the Send job to dialog box, which enables you to specify
how print jobs are stored on the printer’s hard disk.
• E Print
• F Print (auto delete)
• G Save in mail box
H Save data before printing Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk.
438 Mac OS X Software
Printer Driver
Support Pane (Mac OS X)
On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the
latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s
manual to be installed on your computer.
C Settings
The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box,
which enables you to specify where to save the le.
D About
You can display version information for the printer driver.
Mac OS X Software 439
Printmonitor
Printmonitor
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•
•
•
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer
again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.
4. Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the
Search button.
Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
5. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
440 Mac OS X Software
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Environment
System requirements
The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.
• Printing over a TCP/IP network
• Compatible operating systems
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)
• Windows Server 2008 (Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition)
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the operating systems mentioned
• Printing over an AppleTalk network
• Compatible operating systems
• Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the operating systems mentioned
Note
• The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.
• Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.
• Printing over a NetWare network
• Compatible servers
• Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0
• Compatible clients
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Professional)
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the operating systems mentioned
Note
• In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.
Network Setting 441
Network Setting
Network Environment
After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and
computers as needed.
• Example of a Windows network
In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.
Note
• NetBIOS is not supported.
• Example of a Macintosh network
In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour (Zeroconf) functions.
• Example of a NetWare network
Note
• Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.
In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.
442 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer
You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.
The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions
in the Quick Start Guide.
Congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or
PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network
connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.
• Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (→P.444)
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.445)
• Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.446)
Important
• If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer’s IP address, printing may no longer
be possible after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before
has been assigned. Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and
congure the settings in one of the following ways.
• Congure the setting for dynamic DNS updating
In RemoteUI, activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update. (→P.448)
• Congure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up
Note
• We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other
than TCP/IP networks. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure
the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
Network Setting 443
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.416)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the Product Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
444 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel
This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
After you press ◄ or ► to select the input eld, numerical input is possible.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
Note
• Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is “255,” after which “0” is
displayed.
• Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is “0,” after which “255” is
displayed.
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
8.
9.
Repeat steps 6-7 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any settings are changed, a conrmation message is displayed. In this case, press the OK
button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 9. This will activate the values you have entered.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
Network Setting 445
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands
This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.
To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm
the MAC address on the Control Panel.
1.
Check the printer’s MAC address.
You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the ► button.
Note
• You can investigate the MAC address by printing a Status Print report.
(→P.69)
2.
3.
In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.
Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses
and corresponding MAC addresses.
arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]
Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx
Note
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
00:00:85:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
4.
Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.
ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479
Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479
Note
• In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
Note
• The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0.” Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask
and default gateway to match your network settings.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
446 Network Setting
Network Setting
Using RemoteUI
Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from
the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network settings.
To access RemoteUI, start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to
display the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.
•
•
•
•
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.448)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.450)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.451)
Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.453)
Note
• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and
other status information, and cancel print jobs.
• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. To change the display language, select the desired
language under Language before logging on in administrator mode.
Important
• Use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web
browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.
• Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the
printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser
proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)
• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.
• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are
correctly congured.
Network Setting 447
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Use DHCP
Activate this setting to use DHCP Off
for conguring the IP address.
Use BOOTP
Activate this setting to use
BOOTP for conguring the IP
address.
Use RARP
Activate this setting to use RARP Off
for conguring the IP address.
Enable DNS Dynamic Update
Activate this setting to perform
DNS server registration
automatically.
Off
Use Zeroconf Function
Activate this setting to use
Bonjour.
On
IP Address
Specify the printer’s IP address.
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address
Specify the printer’s default
gateway.
0.0.0.0
LPD Printing
Activate this setting to use LDP
Printing.
On
IPP Printing
Activate this setting to use IPP
Printing.
On
IPP Printer URI
Specify the URI of the printer
printer
used for IPP printing using up to
252 characters.
When using a standard Windows
port for IPP printing, enter an
URL less than 255 bytes for
all characters for “http://"IP
address"/IPP-URI.”
RAW Printing
Activate this setting to use Raw
Printing.
448 Network Setting
Off
On
Network Setting
Item
7.
Default Setting
Details
RAW Mode Bi-direction
Activate this setting to use
Raw mode bidirectional
communication.
Off
FTP Printing
Activate this setting to use FTP
Printing.
On
SMTP Server Address
Specify the SMTP server’s IP
address.
0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server Address
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name
Specify the printer host name,
up to 63 characters (1-63
characters). Use single-byte
letters, numbers, and “-”
(hyphens). Do not use numbers
or “-” for the rst character or “-”
for the last character.
NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx
DNS Domain Name
Specify the printer domain
blank
name, up to 63 characters. Use
single-byte letters, numbers, “-”
(hyphens), and “.” (periods). Do
not use numbers, “-”, or “.” for the
rst character, or “-” or “.” for the
last character.
Multicast DNS Service Name
Specify the printer’s Multicast
Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)
DNS service name. (1-63
characters)
This name will be displayed when
Bonjour functions are used.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Note
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that
supports such protocol running in the network.
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this
method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.
• It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend
clearing check boxes of options you will not use.
• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS
servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS
Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.
Network Setting 449
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk
Protocol Settings page.
6.
Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleTalk Settings Items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Phase Type
Specify whether to use AppleTalk. Disabled
If you will use AppleTalk, choose
Phase 2.
If you will not use AppleTalk,
choose Disabled.
Name (*1)
Specify the object name used by Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)
AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, *, :,
and =.
Zone (*2)
Specify the printer zone name, up *
to 31 single-byte characters.
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, :, and
=. Also avoid using “*” (which
represents the default zone) in
the middle of a string.
*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center )
in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to
each printer. By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is
the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7.
Click OK to display the Network page.
450 Network Setting
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetWare Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Frame Type
Specify the type of frame to
use in NetWare.
NCP Burst Mode
Activate this setting to use
On
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally, leave
the setting On.
Print Application
Choose the print service.
• Bindery PServer
• RPrinter
• NDS PServer
• NPrinter
Packet Signature
Select If Requested by Server If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name
Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetWare print
server.
(0-47 characters)
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server.
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
RPrinter
Disabled
NDS PServer
Network Setting 451
Network Setting
Item
NDS
PServer
NPrinter
7.
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-15)
0
Tree Name
Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetWare print
server.
(0-32 characters)
-
Context Name
Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server.
(0-255 characters)
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-64 characters)
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server.
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-254)
Click OK to display the Network page.
452 Network Setting
Default Setting
Details
0
Network Setting
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.
To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information
or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.
6.
Refer to the table of settings for device information, security, and email notication as you
complete these settings.
Device Information Settings
Item
Details
Default Setting
Device Name
Enter a device name.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Location
Enter the location where the device is installed.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Administrator
Enter the administrator’s name.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Phone
Enter the administrator’s contact information.
(0-32 characters)
blank
Comments(E-mail)
Enter any comments regarding the administrator. blank
(0-32 characters)
Security Settings
Item
Details
Default Setting
Old Password
Enter the current device password.
(0-14 characters)
blank
New Password
Enter the new password.
(0-14 characters)
blank
Conrm
Enter the new password again to conrm it.
(0-14 characters)
blank
Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as IP
address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or
IPP and FTP authentication settings.
7.
Click OK to activate the settings.
Network Setting 453
Network Setting
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors
Occur
The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can
know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or
at your computer.
Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.
Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication
when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,see “Specifying
Printer-Related Information”. (→P.453)
Note
• For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
454 Network Setting
Network Setting
Initializing the Network Settings
Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.
Important
• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result,
the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.
• For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.
(→P.443)
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.
After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Note
• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default
network settings.
• If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN
MENU, and then press ▲, ▼, and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →
Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.
Network Setting 455
Network Setting (Windows)
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you
will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
The procedure described below is the conguration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard
TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).
Important
• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.443)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.
Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.
Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.
In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
Click New Port.
After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP
Printer Port Wizard.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Next.
In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer’s IP address.
Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.
Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.
Click Close to close the printer properties window.
456 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Sharing the Printer in Windows
If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows
Vista, or Windows Server 2008, the computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients)
connected to it for printing. This topic describes how to share the printer in Windows.
Important
• We recommend that your network administrator congure your network for printer sharing.
1.
Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
2.
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window.
Network Setting 457
Network Setting (Windows)
3.
On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.
4.
To print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow
the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.
If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver le, insert the provided User
Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.
5.
Click OK.
Important
• When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type
screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print
server.
458 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetWare Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Frame Type
Specify the type of frame to
use in NetWare.
NCP Burst Mode
Activate this setting to use
On
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally, leave
the setting On.
Print Application
Choose the print service.
• Bindery PServer
• RPrinter
• NDS PServer
• NPrinter
Packet Signature
Select If Requested by Server If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name
Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetWare print
server.
(0-47 characters)
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server.
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
RPrinter
Disabled
NDS PServer
Network Setting 459
Network Setting (Windows)
Item
NDS
PServer
NPrinter
7.
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-15)
0
Tree Name
Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetWare print
server.
(0-32 characters)
-
Context Name
Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server.
(0-255 characters)
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-64 characters)
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server.
(0-20 characters)
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a NetWare print server.
(0-47 characters)
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-254)
Click OK to display the Network page.
460 Network Setting
Default Setting
Details
0
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type
To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame
type in your NetWare environment.
Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the
printer Control Panel.
Note
• You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.
Important
• Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.416)
Specifying the Frame Type Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.
Click ETHERNET II under Frame Type in TCP/IP.
In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in
Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.
Important
• You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using
RemoteUI.
7.
8.
9.
Click Set.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Network Setting 461
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the Frame Type Using the Printer Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
10.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 10. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
462 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Print Services
Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues,
and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.
• NWADMIN
• PCONSOLE
(from Novell, provided with NetWare)
Important
• If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client
software) must be installed as the client software application.
• NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.
This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary
depending on the environment.
Choosing the type of print services
Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions
as needed.
Note
• In NetWare 5.1 or 6.0, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the Novell
printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare
documentation.
• NDS (Novell Directory Service) and bindery
NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.
• Queue server mode and remote printer mode
Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.
• Queue server mode
When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for
other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS
print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print
server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is
required for each network interface.
• Remote printer mode
In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare
print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for
printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.
Network Setting 463
Network Setting (Windows)
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server
Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.
Run Quick Setup.
1. Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.
2. Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right
and choose the name from the list.
3. Enter a desired printer name in Name.
4. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in
remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and
Connection Type to Manual Load.
5. Enter a desired queue name in Name.
6. In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the
network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.
7. Complete other settings as needed and click OK.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Write down
the print server name for future reference.
• When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in
queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”
3.
Set a password.
1. Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.
2. Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.
3. Click OK to close the password input dialog box.
4. Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.
4.
To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.
To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le
server and press the Enter key.
Note
• This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.
464 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
3.
Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.
Switch to bindery mode.
If the print server has not been created, create it.
1. In Available Options, select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.
2. Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Write down
the print server name for future reference.
4.
Specify the printer type.
1. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer
mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.
2. Press the Esc key.
3. After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.
5.
Set a password.
1. In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.
2. Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.
3. Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.
4. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
6.
Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE
is nished.
7.
Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.
Network Setting 465
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Protocols
Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.
Note
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
7.
Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.
To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.
Note
• Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.
8.
In Print Application, click the print service to be used.
Note
• Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at
the same time.
9.
10.
For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.
Complete the following settings based on the selected service.
• If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In File Server Name, enter the le server name.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare
Print Services. (→P.463)"
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.463)"
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.463)"
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print
Services. (→P.463)"
466 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
• If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)
1. In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare
Print Services. (→P.463)"
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.463)"
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.463)" Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of
the print server.
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in "Specifying NetWare Print
Services. (→P.463)"
11.
12.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Click Reset to activate the settings.
For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.
(→P.451)
Note
• If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user
information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown, and the User Name
information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER.
Network Setting 467
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring NetWare Network Settings
To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
1.
Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.
For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.461)
2.
Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.463)
3.
Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.466)
After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the
NetWare network.
4.
Connect to the NetWare network.
Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and
log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and
operating system documentation.
5.
Install the printer driver.
Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer
to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer
destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.
6.
Follow these steps to congure the printer port. This step is not necessary if you specied the
printer destination during installation of the printer driver.
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
2. Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.
3. Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.
4. As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service
settings.
468 Network Setting
Network Setting (Windows)
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
Network Setting 469
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.416)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the Product Name list displayed, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
470 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)
Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the
printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
• If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk
Networks (Macintosh)”. (→P.473)
• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring
the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.476)
• If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P.479)
Network Setting 471
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk
Protocol Settings page.
6.
Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleTalk Settings Items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Phase Type
Specify whether to use AppleTalk. Disabled
If you will use AppleTalk, choose
Phase 2.
If you will not use AppleTalk,
choose Disabled.
Name (*1)
Specify the object name used by Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)
AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte
or 15 double-byte characters).
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, *, :,
and =.
Zone (*2)
Specify the printer zone name, up *
to 31 single-byte characters.
However, do not use the following
single-byte characters: @, :, and
=. Also avoid using “*” (which
represents the default zone) in
the middle of a string.
*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center )
in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to
each printer. By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).” (Here, xxxxxx is
the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7.
Click OK to display the Network page.
472 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks
(Macintosh)
To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.
Activating AppleTalk on the printer
Important
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a conrmation message is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 5. This will activate the values you have entered.
Note
• By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer
zone name.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
Network Setting 473
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the destination (Mac OS X)
Important
• AppleTalk is supported in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4.
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.
In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active,
and click Apply now.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close the Network window and save the settings.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
474 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
7.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
Network Setting 475
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)
Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network.
Important
• If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.445)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer
Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
4.
Click More Printers.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.
476 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
5.
In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF).
6.
Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add.
Network Setting 477
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
7.
Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.
Important
• If imagePROGRAF Generic is indicated in Kind, the printer information is not properly acquired. Make
sure the printer is on and connected to the network. (→P.634)
478 Network Setting
Network Setting (Mac OS X)
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)
In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the
steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.
Important
• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a
router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information
about network settings, ask your network administrator.
• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Printer Setup Utility
(or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS Service Name. You can activate
or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on
changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.447)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
4.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
Network Setting 479
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printer Hard Disk Operations
Printer hard disk operations are available from the following programs and interfaces.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer driver
imagePROGRAF HDI Driver
imagePROGRAF Free Layout
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
RemoteUI
Control Panel
The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.
imagePrinter driver PROGRAF
imageFree Layout
PROGRAF
Color imageWindows
imageStatus
RUNNER
PROGRAF
Monitor
Enlargement
HDI Driver
Copy
Color imageimageRUNNER
Printer driver
PROGRAF
Mac OS
Enlargement
Printmonitor
Copy
Availability
Availability
Availability
Operation
Saving print
jobs
480 Hard Disk
RemoteUI
Control
Panel
Availability
Availability
Print
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Print (auto
delete)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Save in mail
box
Yes
No
No
No
No
Save data
before
printing(*1)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Do not save
print jobs in
the common
box
No
No
No
No
Yes
Save print
No
jobs sent
from sources
other than the
printer driver
No
No
No
Yes
Hard Disk
imagePROGRAF
imageFree Layout
PROGRAF
Color imageimageStatus
RUNNER
PROGRAF
Monitor
Enlargement
HDI Driver
Copy
Color imageimageRUNNER
Printer driver
PROGRAF
Enlargement
Printmonitor
Copy
Availability
Availability
Availability
Printer driver
Windows
Mac OS
Operation
RemoteUI
Control
Panel
Availability
Availability
Operations
with saved
jobs
Print saved
jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete saved
jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job queue
management
Display job
queue
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Preempt Jobs No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Move saved
jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Modify saved No
jobs
No
Yes
Yes
No
Modify mail
boxes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Print a list of
saved jobs
No
No
No
No
Yes
Display a list
of saved jobs
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display free
hard disk
space
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initialize hard No
disk
No
No
No
Yes
Display
the time of
printing
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mail box
management
Other
operations
Display error messages
*1:This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print jobs
are saved and then printed.
Hard Disk 481
Hard Disk
Saved Print Jobs
Saving print jobs refers to the process of sending print jobs from a computer and storing them on the printer’s
hard disk. By saving print jobs, you can print them repeatedly as needed without sending them from a
computer again.
Saving print jobs enables you to do the following things.
• Save the time spent using a computer
When you send a print job to the printer, you can either print it and save it on the printer at the same time
or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required
quantity later without the need to use a computer again.
• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur
If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing
the error without resending the print job from a computer.
• Streamline printing work
Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also
select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night,
for example.
Format of saved print jobs
Choose the format when saving print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. Choose from three formats for saving
print jobs: Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. You can also choose Save data before
printing, as desired.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
Note
• The saving format cannot be specied during HP-GL/2 printing. Instead, the saving format is identied
as Print.
482 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Storage destination
The storage area on the printer’s hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage
area. Print jobs in the “job queue” or “Common Box” are saved in the temporary storage area. Jobs in
“Personal Boxes” are saved in the permanent storage area.
• Job queue
Print jobs in progress(*1) are temporarily saved in the job queue, a storage space where jobs are
saved in the order they will be printed.
Up to ten jobs can be stored in the queue. Subsequent jobs are treated as "standby" jobs, to be
processed when possible.
*1: Jobs that are being saved, received, prepared for processing, processed, or printed, or jobs that
have been interrupted or are being deleted
• Common Box
If you have specied Print as the format, jobs sent from the computer are saved in the Common Box.
There is one Common Box, numbered “00”. A password cannot be set for the Common Box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the
oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 100 jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined
• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto
delete) are received
• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format
Save in mail box are received
• Personal Boxes
You can store jobs in Personal Boxes in either of the following ways.
• By moving a job stored in the Common Box into a Personal Box
• By selecting Save in mail box as the format
There are 29 Personal Boxes, numbered “01” to “29”. You can specify a name and password for
each Personal Box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all Personal Boxes combined.
Hard Disk 483
Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the
Printer Driver
To save print jobs sent from software or systems other than the printer driver provided with the printer, complete
the Output Method and Save and Print settings in the printer menu.
Important
• Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function.
Specifying Output Method
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Output Method, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the output method, and then press the OK button.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (Auto Del)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save: Box 01 (Here, the number represents a box number)
Save print jobs on the printer. If you select this option, go to step 5 and select the box for saving
print jobs.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box, and then press the OK button.
Specifying Save and Print
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save and Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, or Off, and then press the OK button.
If you select On, print jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
484 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs
You can save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.
Save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
• Using the printer driver (Windows) (→P.486)
• Using HDI Driver (Windows)
See "Output Method Setting."
• Using Free Layout (Windows)
See the section on the Output Method dialog box.
• Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Windows)
See the section on the Output Method button on the Output Settings sheet.
• Using imagePROGRAF Preview (Windows)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.486)
• Using the printer driver (Mac OS) (→P.488)
• Using Free Layout (Mac OS)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.488)
• Using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (Mac OS)
See the section on the Output Method button in the Output Settings pane.
• Using imagePROGRAF Preview (Mac OS)
Printer driver settings will be used for the format of saved print jobs. (→P.488)
However, the document name will be imagePROGRAF.
Hard Disk 485
Hard Disk
Using the printer driver (Windows)
1.
Access the Page Setup sheet.
2.
Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.
3.
In Output Method, choose the format for saved print jobs.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer.
If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination personal box in the Mail box list.
Note
• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display personal box names in the Mail box list, as acquired
from the printer.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
486 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
4.
In Name of data to be saved, specify how to name saved print jobs.
• To use the le name, choose Use le name.
• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.
5.
Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.
Hard Disk 487
Hard Disk
Using the printer driver (Mac OS)
1.
Access the Additional Settings pane.
2.
In Send job to, choose the format for saved print jobs.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer.
The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box. Here, specify the name
and personal box number for saved print jobs.
1. In Document title, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.
2. Select the personal box number in the Mail box list.
3. Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.
Note
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
488 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box
If you have specied Print in the printer driver as the format for saving print jobs, jobs sent from the computer
are saved in the Common Box. (→P.482)
You can select Save: Shared Box > Off in the printer menu so that print jobs for which you have selected Output
Method > Print in the printer driver are deleted from the box after printing.
Use this function when printing highly condential documents.
Note
• If an error occurs, print jobs that are printed after you clear the error are deleted.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Save: Shared Box, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
Hard Disk 489
Hard Disk
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting Other
Jobs)
Print jobs can be deleted or their printing order changed to print them immediately, depending on their status.
You can determine the status of print jobs in Windows by checking the Control Panel, RemoteUI, or
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and on a Macintosh computer by checking imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
• Deleting queued print jobs
You cannot manually delete jobs that are already in the process of being deleted.
• Preempting other jobs
Print jobs that are being received or prepared for printing can be selected for preemptive printing.
You can manage queued print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel (→P.491)
Using RemoteUI (→P.491)
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) (→P.492)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh) (→P.492)
490 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
2.
You can manage queued jobs as follows.
• Deleting queued jobs
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu, and then press the OK button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.
• Changing the order of printing
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Mgmt Menu, and then press the OK button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print rst, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Preempt Jobs, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
On the Print Job page, select the job to manage and how to manage it. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 491
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
On the Job sheet, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
On the Driver pane, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
492 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
By default, no passwords are set for personal boxes. For greater security, you can set passwords for each
personal box. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the personal box settings, as well as to
display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the personal box.
Note
• A password cannot be set for the common box.
• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001-9999.
• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access personal boxes in Administrator
Mode in RemoteUI.
You can set a password for a personal box as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
2.
On the Stored Job page, select the personal box for a password.
Click Edit.
Hard Disk 493
Hard Disk
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set Password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Conrmation Number : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
494 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box for a password and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
Hard Disk 495
Hard Disk
3.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Re-enter to conrm : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
496 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved
job and click Set.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set password : Select the check box.
• Password : Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Verify : Re-enter the password to conrm it.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 497
Hard Disk
Naming Personal Boxes
By default, personal boxes are unnamed. You can name them for easier management.
You can assign a name to a personal box as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, select the personal box to identify.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
498 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
2.
Click Edit.
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, enter the personal box name in Inbox Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 499
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed personal box to identify and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
500 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 501
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved
job and click Set.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the personal box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
502 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
You can display saved print jobs in the box shared among all users and in each personal box.
View the list of stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Display a list of saved print jobs.
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00-29), and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.
Hard Disk 503
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
Choose a mail box on the Stored Job page to display a list of jobs saved in that mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
504 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Jobs saved in the mail box are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 505
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in that mail box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
506 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 507
Hard Disk
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
You can print a list of saved print jobs in the common box and each personal box.
You can also print a list of print jobs by using the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print a list of saved print jobs.
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00-29), and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
508 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printing Saved Jobs
You can print jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print the saved job.
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00-29), and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.
8. Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
Hard Disk 509
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
510 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Print.
3.
On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 511
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Print.
512 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
Note
• The printing time initially indicates how long it took to nish printing one copy during the previous
print job.
If you change the value in Copies, the printing time indicates the time it took to print one copy during
the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 513
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1.
In the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Resume Printing to display the Resume Printing
dialog box.
514 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
Specify the number of copies and click the OK button.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 515
Hard Disk
Moving Saved Jobs
Print jobs that you have saved in the Print format are saved in the common box, number “00”. However, jobs in
this mail box will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 101 saved jobs in the common box and job queue combined
• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto delete)
are received
• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format
Save in mail box are received
You can move jobs to personal boxes “01” to “29” to prevent them from being deleted. (Up to 100 jobs can
be stored here.)
You can also move saved jobs from one personal box to another.
You can move stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Note
• Jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the common box.
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
516 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Move.
Hard Disk 517
Hard Disk
3.
On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination personal box in
the Destination mail box list and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
518 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Move.
Hard Disk 519
Hard Disk
3.
In the Move dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
520 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Move.
3.
In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination personal box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 521
Hard Disk
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs
You can view details of stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
522 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
The Details of the saved document page is displayed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 523
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
524 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 525
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
526 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Renaming Saved Jobs
You can rename stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Hard Disk 527
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
3.
On the Details of the saved document page, click Change Document.
528 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
4.
On the Rename Saved Document page, enter the new job name in Document Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Hard Disk 529
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
530 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Properties dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 531
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
The password is a four-digit number.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Set.
532 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.
Documents cannot be renamed unless a password has been set. In this case, specify a
password. After renaming, you can cancel the password as needed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 533
Hard Disk
Deleting Saved Jobs
You can delete saved jobs in the box shared among all users and in each personal box.
Delete stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Mac OS)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Delete the saved job.
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Stored Job, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the box number (in the range 00-29), and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the OK button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.
8. Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.
534 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Hard Disk 535
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
536 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
Hard Disk 537
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
538 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
You can check the space available on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information, and then press the ► button.
Note
• You can also check the available hard disk space in the submenu indicating printer information. Press
the Information button to display the submenus. (→P.67)
Hard Disk 539
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk
space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help le.
540 Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Pane in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help le.
Hard Disk 541
Hard Disk
Erasing Data on the Printer’s Hard Disk
You can erase data on the printer’s hard disk from the Control Panel.
There are three ways to erase the data, as follows.
Erasure Method
Time Required
Details
High Speed
A few seconds
Erases le management data for print job data stored on the
printer’s hard disk. Choose this method for relatively fast
erasure. Because only the le management data is erased, the
print job data itself is not erased. Note that it may be possible to
read this data using commercial data recovery software.
Secure High Spd.
About 40 minutes
Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data. No verication
is performed to check if the data was correctly written. Choose
this method to erase highly condential data. Note that it may
be possible to read the overwritten data using specialized data
recovery tools.
Secure
About 24 hours
Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00, FF, and random data
(one time each). Verication is performed to check if the data
was correctly written. Choose this method to erase especially
condential data. It is virtually impossible to recover the
overwritten data. Conforms to the DoD5220.22-M standard of
the U.S. Department of Defense.
Note
• For a more secure method of preventing data recovery, we recommend physically or magnetically
destroying the hard disk. In this case, the hard disk can no longer be used.
• You cannot erase data on the hard disk during print jobs.
• Conversely, print jobs cannot be processed during erasure of hard disk data.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the method of erasure, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button to display the conrmation screen.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button to start erasure.
542 Hard Disk
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead
If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the printhead.
• Printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors
Execute Nozzle Check to check for printhead nozzle clogging.
For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.577)
• Printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment
Use Auto Head Adj. or Manual Head Adj to adjust the printhead position.
Normally, use Auto Head Adj.. However, when using special paper or if printing is not improved after
executing Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. , try Manual Head Adj.
For adjustment instructions, Automatic Straightening of Lines and Colors (Auto Head Adj.) (→P.544) or
see “Manual Straightening of Lines and Colors (Manual Head Adj)”. (→P.546)
• Printed lines are misaligned
Execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the printhead.
Even slight misalignment can be corrected.
For adjustment instructions, see “Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)”. (→P.548)
• Paper rubs against the printhead, or image edges are blurred
Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results.
For adjustment instructions, see “Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images (Head Height)”.
(→P.551)
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 543
Adjusting the Printhead
Automatic Straightening of Lines and Colors (Auto Head
Adj.)
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment.
Use Auto Head Adj. to have the printer print and read a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the printhead.
Auto Head Adj. offers two modes, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj..
Standard Adj. will x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj..
Note
• If advanced adjustment does not improve printing results, or if you are using special paper, try manual
adjustment.
For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Manual Straightening of Lines and Colors (Manual Head
Adj)”. (→P.546)
• Use Standard Adj. if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between
colors to appear as attractive as possible.
• Use Advanced Adj. to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead
or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using Advanced
Adj. for printing at a higher level of image quality.
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
• This function is not available with CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear Film.
If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try another type
of paper, or try adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.546)
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
Standard Adj. : One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Advanced Adj. : Five sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
(or one sheet when using A2 or larger, or two sheets when using A3
loaded lengthwise)
544 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
Execute Auto Head Adj. as follows.
1.
Load paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
Adjustment is now nished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.
7.
If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Advanced Adj., a conrmation message
is displayed asking you whether to continue printing. Press the OK button and follow the
instructions displayed.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 545
Adjusting the Printhead
Manual Straightening of Lines and Colors (Manual Head
Adj)
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment.
With Manual Head Adj, you can manually adjust the Printhead alignment by printing and reading a test pattern.
You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If
advanced adjustment does not improve printing results, or if you are using special paper, try manual adjustment.
For instructions on straightening lines and colors automatically, see “Automatic Straightening of Lines and Colors
(Auto Head Adj.)”. (→P.544)
Note
• If Manual Head Adj is not available although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto
Head Adj.. Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Advanced Adj. once.
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Execute Manual Head Adj as follows.
1.
Load paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the ► button.
546 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
8.
Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment and determine the number of the pattern
with straight lines.
Note
• If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
Repeat steps 7 and 9 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-7 to D-11.
Press the ◄ button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 547
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)
If printed lines are misaligned, try adjusting the angle of the Printhead. Even slight misalignment can be corrected.
Adjust the Printhead orientation by printing and reading a test pattern.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Execute Head Inc. Adj. as follows.
1.
Load the paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
Note
• When loading paper, specify the type of paper correctly. Using paper that you have not specied on
the printer may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.
• We recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Inc. Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the Printhead is moved, a message is displayed requesting you to open the Top Cover.
6.
Open the Top Cover.
548 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
7.
Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and close the Top Cover.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
8.
Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the straightest set of lines.
9.
Open the Top Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to match the number (or the square)
of the straightest set of lines.
If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle Adjustment Lever to a position
between the numbers (or between the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that
are least misaligned.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 549
Adjusting the Printhead
10.
Close the Top Cover.
The Printhead is now straight, and adjustment is complete.
550 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the Printhead
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
(Head Height)
If paper rubs against the printer or the edge is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the Printhead height may
improve results.
If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 551
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount
If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the feed amount.
• Banding in different colors
• Line length is not accurate in the direction paper is fed
To adjust the feed amount, do the following, in this order.
1.
Depending on the issue, change the Feed Priority setting for the particular type of paper.
(→P.553)
2.
Based on the Feed Priority setting, use Auto Band Adj., Manual Band Adj, or Adjust Length.
(→P.554) (→P.556) (→P.559)
3.
If additional ne-tuning is necessary after Auto Band Adj. or Manual Band Adj, use Fine Band
Adj. in the Menu Durng Prtng. (→P.558)
552 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed
Priority)
Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set for each type of paper, in the Feed Priority setting.
Adjust the Feed Priority setting to suit your particular printing application.
• Band Joint : Adjusts the feed amount to reduce banding across the sheet in printed documents.
The settings of Auto Band Adj. or Manual Band Adj are applied. If you have executed Fine Band
Adj., in addition to the settings of Auto Band Adj. or Manual Band Adj, the settings of Fine Band
Adj. are also applied.
• Print Length : Adjusts the feed amount for better accuracy of lines in printed documents.
The settings of A:High or B:Standard/Draft in the Adjust Length menu are applied.
• Automatic : Band Joint or Print Length is selected, depending on Print Priority as selected in the
printer driver at the time of printing.
Image or Ofce Document : Band Joint is selected.
Line Drawing/Text : Print Length is selected.
Note
• Use Manual Band Adj for transparent media or other paper for which adjustment with Auto Band
Adj. is not possible.
• Either B:Standard/Draft or A:High in the Adjust Length menu is applied, depending on printer driver
settings at the time of printing.
• If you have selected Easy Settings in the printer driver, follow these steps to conrm the Print Priority
setting.
• Windows: Click View Settings on the Main tab to display the View Settings dialog box.
• Mac OS X: Click View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Automatic, Band Joint or Print Length and then press the OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 553
Adjusting the feed amount
Auto Band Adjustment (Auto Band Adj.)
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
Auto Band Adj. offers two modes, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj.. Use Advanced Adj. if Standard
Adj. does not eliminate banding, or when using paper other than genuine Canon paper or paper for purposes
other than checking output.
Always check the Feed Priority setting before using Auto Band Adj.. (→P.553)
Note
• When using highly transparent media not compatible with Auto Band Adj., you must adjust the feed
amount manually. (→P.556)
• If additional ne-tuning is necessary after Auto Band Adj., use Fine Band Adj.. (→P.558)
• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed
at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when
adjusting the feed amount. (→P.559)
• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
Standard Adj. : One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Advanced Adj. : Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
(or one sheet when using A2 or larger)
Execute Auto Band Adj. as follows.
1.
Load paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
554 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.
Adjustment is now nished if you have printed on a roll or on sheets of A2 size or larger.
7.
If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Standard Adj., a conrmation message is
shown on the Display Screen, requesting you to continue printing. Press the OK button and
follow the instructions on the Display Screen.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 555
Adjusting the feed amount
Manual Band Adjustment (Manual Band Adj)
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
Use Manual Band Adj for transparent media or other paper for which adjustment with Auto Band Adj. is
not possible.
We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of paper. (→P.554)
Always check the Feed Priority setting before using Manual Band Adj. (→P.553)
Note
• If additional ne-tuning is necessary after Manual Band Adj, use Fine Band Adj.. (→P.558)
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
Two sheets of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Execute Manual Band Adj as follows.
1.
Load paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.
556 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
6.
Examine test pattern A for band adjustment. Determine the pattern in which streaks are least
noticeable.
Note
• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to display the number selected in step 6, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.
8.
Examine test pattern B for band adjustment. Determine the pattern in which streaks are least
noticeable.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to display the number selected in step 8, and then press the OK button.
The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 557
Adjusting the feed amount
Banding Adjustment During Printing (Fine Band Adj.)
If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears at 50
mm (2 in.) intervals, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to printing
in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is paused,
colors may be slightly different.
Use Fine Band Adj. after Auto Band Adj. or Manual Band Adj if ner adjustment is required. (→P.554) (→P.556)
Note
• The Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0 if you use Auto Band Adj. or Manual Band Adj.
Execute Fine Band Adj. during printing as follows.
1.
Press the Online button to pause printing.
2.
Press the Menu button to display the menu during printing. (→P.66)
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Menu Durng Prtng, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.
Note
• The supported range is -5 to +5.
6.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
558 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length)
Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length.
In the Adjust Length menu, choose the mode of length adjustment ( A:High or B:Standard/Draft ) that
suits your particular printing application.
• A:High : This setting is applied when Highest or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.
• B:Standard/Draft : This setting is applied when Standard or Draft is selected in Print Quality in
the printer driver.
Check the Feed Priority setting before using Adjust Length. (→P.553)
Note
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• If you have selected Easy Settings on the printer, follow these steps to conrm the Print Quality setting.
• Windows: Click View Settings on the Main tab to display the View Settings dialog box.
• Mac OS X: Click View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.
Paper to Prepare
Rolls
An unused roll at least 10 inches wide
Sheets
One sheet of unused paper of at least A4/Letter size
Follow these steps to change the Adjust Length setting.
1.
Load paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specied in the settings. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select A:High or B:Standard/Draft, and then press the ► button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 559
Adjusting the feed amount
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.
The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.
Note
• A test pattern is printed in black when you choose A:High or in magenta if you choose
B:Standard/Draft.
• To cancel printing the test pattern for adjustment, hold down the Stop button for a second or more,
and then go to step 7.
7.
Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured
length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.
You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value or ▼ to decrease it.
If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed
longer, set the value toward the negative side.
Note
• You can also specify the adjustment value in Adjust Length in the Paper Details menu. In this
case, no test pattern for adjustment is printed.
560 Adjustments for Better Print Quality
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth)
When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if paper rubs against the printer or
the edge is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve
results.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the
OK button.
Adjustments for Better Print Quality 561
Ink Tanks
Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
Ink tanks that can be used in the printer are labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the side. When
purchasing ink tanks, make sure an “A” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank serial numbers.
• 330 ml (11.2  oz)
• MBK Ink Tank PFI-303MBK
• BK Ink Tank PFI-303BK
• C Ink Tank PFI-303C
• M Ink Tank PFI-303M
• Y Ink Tank PFI-303Y
• 700 ml (23.7  oz)
• MBK Ink Tank PFI-703MBK
• BK Ink Tank PFI-703BK
• C Ink Tank PFI-703C
• M Ink Tank PFI-703M
• Y Ink Tank PFI-703Y
Note
• For instructions on ink tank replacement, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.563)
562 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Replacing Ink Tanks
Compatible ink tanks
Replacement ink tanks in 330 ml (11.2  oz) and 700 ml (23.7  oz) capacities are supported.
These ink tanks are labeled with a white letter “A” in a black circle on the side. Request ink tanks with the
same label when you purchase new ones. For details, see “Ink Tanks”. (→P.562)
Precautions when handling ink tanks
Take the following precautions when handling ink tanks.
Caution
• For safety, keep ink tanks out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• When it is time to install ink tanks, before opening the pouch tilt the tank to the left and right gently seven
or eight times. If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
• Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the ink supply section of ink tanks you remove. Handle ink tanks carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.
Printing quality may be affected if you use older ink tanks.
• Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods (a month or more). Residual ink
may become clogged inside the printer and affect printing quality.
• If you pause printing to replace an ink tank, it may cause uneven colors in the printed image.
How to replace an Ink Tank
1. Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.564)
2. Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.564) (Otherwise, open the Ink Tank Cover.)
3. Remove the Ink Tank.
• 330 ml ink tanks (→P.565)
• 700 ml ink tanks (→P.567)
4. Load the new Ink Tank.
• 330 ml ink tanks (→P.569)
• 700 ml ink tanks (→P.571)
Maintenance 563
Ink Tanks
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement
You can replace ink tanks if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine, or if messages
advise you to check the amount of ink left or replace ink tanks.
If a message requests you to replace ink tanks, press the OK button.
Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead
cleaning.
Note
• Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being advanced.
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement
Note
• This step is not necessary if a message requests you to replace ink tanks. Check the message on the
Display Screen and press the OK button. Remove the Ink Tank at this point.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Remove the Ink
Tank at this point.
564 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml)
1.
Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.
The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.
Caution
• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.
2.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace. Lift the Ink Tank Lock
Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.
Important
• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.
• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position.
Maintenance 565
Ink Tanks
3.
Hold the Ink Tank by the grips (a) and remove it. Press the OK button.
Note
• If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink
may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.
• Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.
566 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml)
1.
Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.
The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.
Caution
• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.
2.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace. Lift the Ink Tank Lock
Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.
Important
• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.
• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position.
Maintenance 567
Ink Tanks
3.
Hold the Ink Tank by the handle (a) and remove it. Press the OK button.
Note
• If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.
568 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Load the ink tank (330 ml)
1.
Before opening the pouch, tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right gently seven or eight times.
Note
• If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
2.
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank,
and affect printing quality.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause
stains.
• Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
3.
Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder with the ink holes facing down,
as shown.
Important
• Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.
If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the
Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank
before reloading it.
Maintenance 569
Ink Tanks
4.
Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.
5.
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the tank.
• Ink lamps ash when there is little ink left.
6.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The printer will go online or ofine.
Important
• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close,
some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure all ink tank lock levers are
fully closed.
570 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
Load the ink tank (700 ml)
1.
Before opening the pouch, hold the new Ink Tank with both hands and tilt it to the left and right as
shown, shaking gently it seven or eight times.
Caution
• 700 ml ink tanks are heavy, so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist.
Note
• If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
2.
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank,
and affect printing quality.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause
stains.
• Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
Maintenance 571
Ink Tanks
3.
Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder with the ink holes facing down,
as shown.
Important
• Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.
If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the
Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank
before reloading it.
4.
Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.
5.
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the tank.
• Ink lamps ash when there is little ink left.
572 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
6.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The printer will go online or ofine.
Important
• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close,
some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure all ink tank lock levers are
fully closed.
• To close the Ink Tank Cover when no Ink Tank is installed (as when moving the printer), push the
release lever (a) as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position.
Maintenance 573
Ink Tanks
Checking Ink Tank Levels
On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.
The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless an error message is displayed.
During error messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.
These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom
of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed
indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format
printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.563)
574 Maintenance
Ink Tanks
When to Replace Ink Tanks
Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.
If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen
When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.
You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.574)
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink
If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which
require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.
If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the
Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.
Maintenance 575
Printheads
Printheads
Printhead
This is a replacement Printhead for the printer.
• Printhead PF-03
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.579)
576 Maintenance
Printheads
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.53)
1.
Load unused paper.
• Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (→P.115)
• Loading Rolls in the Printer (→P.118)
• Loading Sheets in the Printer (→P.150)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.
6.
Check the printing results.
The Printhead L prints the test pattern for nozzle checking on the top line in each color, and the
Printhead R prints the test pattern on the bottom line.
If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.
If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors
are clogged.
If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle
clogging.
1. Clean the Printhead. (→P.578)
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact
your Canon dealer.
Maintenance 577
Printheads
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on the
problem to resolve.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.53)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
Cleaning the Printhead
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the
problem, repeat Head Cleaning B one or two times. If this still does not improve printing, the Printhead
may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tank during cleaning.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about three minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about four minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.577)
578 Maintenance
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
When to replace the Printhead
Replace the Printhead in the following situations.
• If the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the
printer menu
• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the printhead.
• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead
Compatible printheads
For information on compatible printheads, see “Printhead”. (→P.576)
Precautions when handling the Printhead
Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and
there is a risk of burns.
Important
• Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead
from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles
may dry out, which may affect printing quality.
• If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and
metal contacts (→P.582) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the
printing quality.
• Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.
• Never touch the Printhead nozzles or metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.
Maintenance 579
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
Follow these steps to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink to leak from the
Printhead, resulting in stains.
Caution
• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The
metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching
these parts.
Note
• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.
• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new
Printhead for replacement.
• Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after
replacement of the Printhead. (→P.53)
1.
If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.
(→P.366)
2.
3.
Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.597)
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Ink is now lled.
After about two minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open
the Top Cover.
7.
Open the Top Cover.
Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.
580 Maintenance
Printheads
8.
If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have
wrung out completely to wipe it clean.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.
9.
If the ventilation duct (a) is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it
clean. Move the Carriage out of the way manually if the Carriage is concealing the ventilation
duct, and then clean the duct.
10.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.
Maintenance 581
Printheads
11.
Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.
12.
Remove the used Printhead.
Note
• Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.
13.
Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.
Important
• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal
contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.
582 Maintenance
Printheads
14.
While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange
Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.
Important
• Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas
other than the grips.
• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.
• The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to
avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink
to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.
We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the
way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth.
• Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance
with local regulations.
15.
With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into
the Carriage. Carefully push the printhead rmly into the Carriage, ensuring that the nozzles
and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.
16.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.
17.
Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.
Maintenance 583
Printheads
18.
Close the Top Cover.
Ink now lls the system.
After about six minutes, the Printhead will be automatically aligned, and the printer will go online.
If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.
Important
• Never remove an Ink Tank while the system is lling with ink.
• If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead alignment will not be adjusted. In this case,
adjust the alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Advanced Adj. in Auto Head
Adj.. (→P.544)
584 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
A replacement Maintenance Cartridge. The Maintenance Cartridge is provided with a Shaft Cleaner.
• Maintenance Cartridge MC-09
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.
(→P.586)
Maintenance 585
Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Compatible maintenance cartridges
For information on compatible maintenance cartridges, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.585)
Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge
Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.
• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it
at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance
Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine
or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, press the OK button. Steps 2-5
are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 6 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.
Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the
printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being drawn out.
If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to
be blurry.
586 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
6.
At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
7.
Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand
under the Maintenance Cartridge to hold it rmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.
Important
• Used maintenance cartridges are heavy. Always grasp the cartridge rmly and keep the cartridge
level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle,
ink may leak and cause stains.
• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used
Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
Maintenance 587
Maintenance Cartridge
8.
Open the box, remove the plastic bag, packaging material, and Shaft Cleaner (a), and then take
out the Maintenance Cartridge (b).
Important
• Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.
9.
Keep the used Maintenance Cartridge level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from
the plastic bag and seal the zipper.
10.
Conrm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box with the packaging material
attached, and store it so that it stays level.
Important
• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• In accordance with corporate environmental protection policies, Canon collects used maintenance
cartridges. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how
to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.
588 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
11.
Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
Important
• Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it.
12.
Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.
13.
Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
14.
Press the OK button.
The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.
Next, replace the Shaft Cleaner.
Maintenance 589
Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Shaft Cleaner
Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge. New Shaft Cleaner is included
with replacement Maintenance Cartridge.
After you execute Repl. maint cart and replace the Maintenance Cartridge, a message will appear on the
Display Screen requesting you to replace the Shaft Cleaner. Select Yes and press the OK button. Next,
go to step 4.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. S. Cleaner, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the Carriage is moved, the Display Screen indicates Open Upper Cover.
Note
• If you do not respond within two minutes, shaft cleaner replacement is canceled and the printer goes
online automatically. In this case, repeat the procedure.
590 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
5.
Open the Top Cover.
Note
• Do not open the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the front.
Accidentally opening the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the front will draw out ink, which consumes ink.
Maintenance 591
Maintenance Cartridge
6.
Hold the Shaft Cleaner on the right side of the Carriage by the grips (a) and pull it toward you to
remove it.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
7.
After removing the cap of the new Shaft Cleaner, hold it by the grips (a) and attach it to the
Carriage.
Push the Shaft Cleaner until it clicks into place.
Note
• Attach the cap from the new Shaft Cleaner on the used one. Be sure to put the used Shaft Cleaner
in the small box before putting it in the larger box with the used Maintenance Cartridge for disposal.
592 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
8.
Close the Top Cover.
The Carriage is moved, and the printer goes online.
Maintenance 593
Maintenance Cartridge
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other
processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.
Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display
Screen.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a
message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before
tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.586)
594 Maintenance
Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.
If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart
replacement. is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.594)
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted
Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.)
To check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the
Maintenance Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or
transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance 595
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
About once a month, clean the printer exterior.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally
leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.
3.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from
the Paper Feed Slot (a), power cord plug, and so on. Dry these parts with a dry cloth.
Caution
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
Important
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered
with paper dust.
(→P.597)
4.
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
596 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
Clean inside the Top Cover to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
After you have used up a roll
After borderless printing
After printing on small paper
After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris
If you have replaced the roll
After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust
If the message Blue platen switch is dirty. is displayed
Important
• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend
cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with
paper dust.
1.
Open the Top Cover.
2.
If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing
Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush (c) provided with the printer to wipe it away.
Maintenance 597
Cleaning the Printer
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
Avoid cleaning where the Carriage is retracted, in position (d) or (e).
Note
• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
3.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away dirt or paper dust (debris
from cutting) inside the Top Cover.
Wipe away any ink residue and paper dust (debris from cutting) on the Top Cover Roller (a),
all over the Platen (b), the Paper Retainer (c), the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (d), the
Ejection Guide (e), the blue Switch (f), the section around the right-side Borderless Printing
Ink Grooves (g), and so on.
598 Maintenance
Cleaning the Printer
Important
• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may
attract dust and affect the printing quality.
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller. This may damage the roller.
4.
Close the Top Cover.
Maintenance 599
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes ( Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B ), depending on the
problem to resolve.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.53)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
Cleaning the Printhead
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the
problem, repeat Head Cleaning B one or two times. If this still does not improve printing, the Printhead
may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tank during cleaning.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about three minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about four minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.577)
600 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new
location. Refer to the Setup Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.
Important
• Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and
damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped or stood on end in transit.
Note
• It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen requests Maintenance Cartridge
replacement or checking of the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer
preparations. (→P.586)
• Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer
the printer (that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).
• Ink must be drained before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer, as described in the following table.
Prepare a Maintenance Cartridge in advance.
• Always follow the instructions of the service representative when transferring the printer under Level 3
conditions.
Level
1
Shipping
Method
(Example)
By truck
Permitted Angle of Inclination
Lengthwise: 0°-30°
0
Required
Maintenance
Cartridges(*1)
0 or 1
Amount of Ink
to Dispose of
Rotation: 0°-10°
2
By plane
All directions: 0°-30°
Approx. 200 ml
1 or 2
3
Tipping the
printer or
holding it
upright for
elevators or
stairs
Lengthwise: 0°-90°
Rotation: 0°-30°
Approx. 700 ml
2 or 3
*1: The quantity of cartridges required depends on the capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge in use.
Maintenance 601
Other Maintenance
1.
Remove the Wheeled Output Stacker from the printer.
(→P.159)
2.
Remove the paper.
• Rolls (→P.125)
• Sheets (→P.155)
3.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of transfer, and then press the OK button.
After the message Always contact service before preparing to move the printer. is shown
on the Display Screen, press the OK button.
The Display Screen indicates Please Wait...
• If you have selected Level 1 in step 6, after processing in preparation to move the printer is nished,
the message Finished preparing to move printer. Turn off printer. is shown on the Display
Screen. Go to step 15.
• When you are nished preparing to transfer the printer after selecting Level 2 or Level 3 conditions,
the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Follow the procedure starting with
step 8.
Important
• If consumables must be replaced, the message Consumables must be replaced. Call for service.
is shown on the Display Screen and preparation is not possible. If this message is displayed, press
the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
8.
Open the Ink Tank Cover.
602 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
9.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever (a). Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops,
and then push it down to the front.
10.
Remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Store the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may
leak and cause stains.
11.
Repeat steps 9 and 10 to remove all ink tanks.
Maintenance 603
Other Maintenance
12.
Push down the release lever (a) as shown as you gently return all ink tank lock levers to the
original position.
13.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.
When the process is nished, Finished preparing to move printer. Turn off printer. is
displayed.
14.
Press the Power button and turn off the printer.
Important
• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and
transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tank,
wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.
15.
Disconnect the printer power cord and interface cable, as well as the Roll Unit power cord.
604 Maintenance
Other Maintenance
16.
Open the Top Cover, grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper
with a hex screw at the position indicated.
Important
• Here, the Belt Stopper is the one that was removed and stored after initial installation. Neglecting to
attach the Belt Stopper may damage the printer.
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
17.
Close the Top Cover.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.
Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.
Disassemble and repackage the Stand by following the installation procedure in reverse.
Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package
them in a shipping box.
Maintenance 605
Other Maintenance
Updating the Firmware
Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.
Conrming the rmware version
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the OK button.
The rmware version is displayed.
Updating the Firmware
To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the
installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware,
visit the Canon website.
606 Maintenance
Frequently Asked Questions
Troubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the
hyperlinks in the answer column.
Question
Answer
How do I print on a roll?
When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify
the paper type and length, both on the Control Panel
and in the printer driver.
Þ"Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.89) "
How do I print on a sheet?
When printing on sheets, specify the paper type and
size in the printer driver before loading the paper.
Þ"Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.93) "
How do I switch between printing on rolls and sheets? Press the Feeder Selection button to switch the
paper source between the roll and a sheet.
Þ"Selecting the Paper Source (→P.112) "
How do I change the paper type or size?
Specify the type and size of paper, both on the
Control Panel and in the printer driver.
• Specifying it in the printer driver
Þ"Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.223)
"
• Specifying it on the Control Panel
Selecting the paper type
Þ"Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.113) "
Þ"Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.149) "
Selecting the paper size
Þ"Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.114) "
How do I cut the roll paper after printing?
You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and
you can cut rolls at a desired position.
Þ"Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.139) "
How do I print without borders?
Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also
specify borderless printing in the printer driver by
adjusting the original size to match the paper size.
Before borderless printing, set the blue Switch on the
platen to the ● side.
Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Þ"Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
(→P.265) "
Þ"Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit
the Roll Width (→P.272) "
Þ"Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.258) "
Þ"Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen (→P.629) "
Troubleshooting 607
Frequently Asked Questions
Question
Answer
How do I print an A4 original enlarged on A2 paper?
In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image
to match the paper size or width, or you can specify
enlargement or reduction before printing as desired.
Þ"Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(→P.228) "
Þ"Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.234) "
Þ"Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(→P.240) "
How do I print without wasting paper?
To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer
driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without
top and bottom margins.
Þ"Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (→P.335) "
Þ"Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals
Without Top and Bottom Margins (→P.341) "
How do I print without wasting all the blank space
on the right side when printing an A4-sized original
at A3 size?
By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the
printer driver, you can print at A4 size to ll the width
of A3 paper.
Þ"Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (→P.335) "
How do I print in landscape (or portrait) orientation?
You can print originals that are in landscape (or
portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to t the
roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or
horizontal banners.
Þ"Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing) (→P.286) "
How do I print on a custom paper size?
You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the
printer driver.
Þ"Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.297) "
How do I register custom paper sizes?
You can add desired sizes (Custom Paper Sizes) in
the Paper Size Options dialog box of the printer
driver.
Þ"Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.297) "
How do I print lines thicker?
By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer
driver, you can print ne lines thicker to make them
easier to see.
Þ"Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing (→P.211) "
How do I modify how colors are printed?
You can adjust colors as desired in the printer driver
before printing.
Þ"Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.201) "
How do I use printer driver settings again in
subsequent jobs?
By saving settings information in a favorite, you can
apply the settings again before printing anytime as
needed.
Þ"Using Favorites (→P.362) "
608 Troubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions
Question
Answer
Can I use the printer in combination with a Color
imageRUNNER ?
The printer can be used for automatic enlargement
and printing of scanned originals from a Color
imageRUNNER.
Þ"Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from
a Color imageRUNNER (→P.196) "
How do I print enlargements of scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER ?
By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
(iR enlargement copy), you can automatically print
enlargements of scanned originals from a Color
imageRUNNER.
Þ"Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from
a Color imageRUNNER (→P.196) "
Troubleshooting 609
Problems Regarding Paper
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
Note
• If you do not nd any scraps or jams, see “Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found”. (→P.615)
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
610 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
4.
If the Cutter is out, move the Cutter to the right side, away from the paper.
Important
• If the Cutter is on the left side, be sure to move it to the right. If the Cutter is on the left side when you
turn the printer on, the printer may rip the paper.
5.
Lift the Release Lever.
6.
Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or
cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
Troubleshooting 611
Problems Regarding Paper
7.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
8.
Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the
Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b),
keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.
Important
• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the
paper from being advanced straight.
• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.
9.
10.
Close the Top Cover.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.
Note
• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by selecting Paper Cutting in the printer menu.
(→P.139)
612 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the way, away from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Ink Tube Stabilizer (c). Touching these
parts may damage them.
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
Troubleshooting 613
Problems Regarding Paper
5.
Hold the paper and pull it out, toward the front.
Note
• If you do not nd any scraps or jams, see “Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found”.
(→P.615)
6.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
7.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
8.
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
614 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not Found
If you cannot nd a paper jam, search for the paper as follows.
1.
2.
3.
Turn the printer off. (→P.25)
4.
Check for paper in the lower part of the printer. Remove any jammed paper here by pushing it to
Remove the Wheeled Output Stacker from the printer. (→P.159)
Holding the Roll Unit Lever (a), pull out the Roll Unit.
the oor with your ngers.
5.
Lift the Release Lever.
Troubleshooting 615
Problems Regarding Paper
6.
Open the Top Cover, and if there is a paper jam at the position shown, push it inside with your
ngers.
The paper will drop to the oor or to the lower part of the printer.
Note
• If paper remains in the lower part of the printer, push it to the oor with your ngers.
• If the paper does not drop to the oor or to the lower part of the printer, fold an A4 sheet three times,
insert it through the gap of the Platen (a) and the Paper Retainer (b), and push the jammed paper out.
7.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
616 Troubleshooting
Problems Regarding Paper
8.
9.
10.
In a crouching position, push the Roll Unit in.
Position the Wheeled Output Stacker by the printer. (→P.159)
Turn the printer on. (→P.25)
Troubleshooting 617
Problems Regarding Paper
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Cause
The roll paper is warped.
Corrective Action
Straighten out curls and reload the roll.
If paper cannot be advanced from Roll 2 (Lower), the Connect the Roll Unit Cable rmly to the Roll Unit
Roll Unit Cable is disconnected.
Power Supply Inlet and the inlet on the roll unit.
Cannot Load Sheets
Cause
The paper source selection is incorrect.
Corrective Action
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the
Cut Sheet lamp.
Paper is not cut straight
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.
Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.
Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before
it is cut.
Reload the paper correctly.
Paper is not cut
Cause
Corrective Action
In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is
specied in Auto Cut.
Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In MAIN MENU, Eject or Manual is specied in
Cutting Mode.
Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU.
618 Troubleshooting
Printing does not start
Printing does not start
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is not on.
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the
Power button to turn on the printer.
The printer is not selected in the
printer driver. (The printer is in
Sleep mode.)
In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in
the printing dialog box and try printing again.
The print job is paused. (The
printer is in Sleep mode.)
In Windows, restart the print job as follows.
1. Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers )
window.
2. Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or
Print Center ) and try printing again.
In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).
2. Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to
restart the print job.
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent
Cause
The printer is ofine.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.
You have printed when select Save Print the job saved on the printer’s hard disk.
in mail box is selected in Output (→P.509)
Method.
The display screen indicates the system is lling with ink
Cause
The printer was forced off during
operation.
Corrective Action
Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This process may take
about ten minutes.
Troubleshooting 619
The printer stops during a print job
The printer stops during a print job
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
Status
Corrective Action
An error message is displayed during printing.
Check the error message and take action as
necessary.
(→P.648)
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print
job, and paper could not be advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.
(→P.125)
(→P.129)
(→P.89)
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
Status
Corrective Action
The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to
straighten it.
This operation is normal.
The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to
straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim
Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim
Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is
slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial
preparation.
When Off is selected under Trim Edge First, the
edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make
sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.
(→P.577)
Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.578)
A print job was received from an incompatible printer Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for
driver.
the printer and try printing again.
The printer has received print data that includes HP
RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On.
Set Auto Rotate to Off before attempting to print
again.
(→P.53)
The printer is damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the
carriage stops moving)
Cause
The printer is analyzing the print job.
620 Troubleshooting
Corrective Action
Either wait a while for printing to resume, or on
the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to
300dpi.
(→P.53)
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality
Printing is faint
Cause
Corrective Action
You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.
Print on the printing surface.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.577)
Because the printer was left without ink tanks
installed for some time, ink has become clogged in
the ink supply system.
After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours,
run Head Cleaning B.
(→P.578)
Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover.
Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece
of paper inside the Top Cover.
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2. Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage
is not over the Platen.
3. Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover.
(→P.131)
(→P.156)
4. Close the Top Cover.
During borderless printing, the ink was not dry
enough before cutting.
Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in
Roll DryingTime in Paper Details.
(→P.53)
Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced
Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or
Draft.
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose
Highest or High in Print Quality.
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower.
(→P.211)
Troubleshooting 621
Problems with the printing quality
Paper rubs against the printhead
Cause
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer.
Corrective Action
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to
wrinkle.
Reload the paper.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height, choose Automatic.
(→P.551)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong or Strongest. If paper still rubs
against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by
setting Head Height to Highest.
(→P.561)
(→P.551)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting
of Standard, Strong, or Strongest. If paper still rubs
against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by
setting Head Height to Highest.
(→P.561)
(→P.551)
When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin
or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of
Weakest. If paper still rubs against the printhead,
try raising the Printhead by setting Head Height to
Highest.
(→P.561)
(→P.551)
When you have loaded paper, the paper you have
loaded does not match the type selected on the
Display Screen.
622 Troubleshooting
Be sure to select the correct type of paper in the
printer menu when loading paper.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Problems with the printing quality
The edges of the paper are dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
or printing on small paper.
(→P.597)
The paper type as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver.
Make sure the same paper type is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.113)
(→P.149)
Make sure the same paper type is specied in the
printer driver as on the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper type in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The paper is wrinkled or warped.
Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the
paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on
previously.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
A cut line is printed because the function to reduce
cutting dust has been activated.
If this function is not needed, deactivate
CutDustReduct. through the printer menu.
(→P.53)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height, choose Automatic.
(→P.551)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong or Strongest. If paper still rubs
against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by
setting Head Height to Highest.
(→P.561)
(→P.551)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or lm-based
media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of
Standard, Strong, or Strongest. If paper still rubs
against the printhead, try raising the Printhead by
setting Head Height to Highest.
(→P.561)
(→P.551)
The Ejection Guide is soiled.
Clean the Ejection Guide.
(→P.596)
Troubleshooting 623
Problems with the printing quality
The surface of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
Clean the Paper Retainer.
(→P.597)
You are using a paper that does not dry easily.
Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime.
The back side of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen.
or printing on small paper.
(→P.597)
Set CarriageScanWdth to Fixed.
The Platen has become soiled due to printing on the Activate width detection, and open the Top Cover and
Platen because width detection is deactivated.
clean the Platen.
(→P.597)
Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen. After this,
manually advance the roll onto the Platen before
printing.
(→P.597)
(→P.135)
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
624 Troubleshooting
Clean the Paper Retainer.
(→P.597)
Problems with the printing quality
Printed colors are inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
Color adjustment has not been activated in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust
colors.
Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or
monitor.
Refer to the computer and monitor documentation
to adjust the colors.
Adjust the settings of the color management software,
referring to the software documentation as needed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.577)
In the printer driver, Application Color Matching
Priority is not selected.
Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the
printer driver and select Application Color Matching
Priority in the dialog box.
Printhead characteristics gradually change through
repeated use, and colors may change.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.544)
(→P.546)
Color may change slightly even on the same model Follow these steps to prepare the printing
of printer if you use a different version of the rmware environment.
or printer driver, or when you print under different
1. Use the same version of rmware, printer driver,
settings or in a different printing environment.
and other software.
2. Specify the same value for all settings items.
Troubleshooting 625
Problems with the printing quality
Banding in different colors occurs
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.552)
Printing does not proceed smoothly because print
jobs are interrupted during transmission.
Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.
In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in
Feed Priority.
Selecting Band Joint may improve printing results.
Adjust the feed amount in the printer menu by
specifying Band Joint in Feed Priority and try
printing again.
(→P.552)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.544)
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.577)
Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too
low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try
printing again.
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower.
(→P.211)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does Load paper of the same type as you have specied
not match the type loaded in the printer.
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
626 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Colors in printed images are uneven
Cause
Corrective Action
Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images Specify Image in the printer driver.
in many solid colors.
You are printing on paper that curls easily.
Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading
edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase
the level of vacuum holding the paper against the
Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in.) or
more for the leading edge.
(→P.561)
Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print
Quality too low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster and
consumes less ink than in Highest or High modes,
but the printing quality is lower.
(→P.211)
Color may be uneven between dark and light image
areas.
Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced
Settings of the printer driver.
When borderless printing is used, the edge of the
paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may
be uneven at the edges.
Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before
printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without
borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the
printed document ejected from the printer, then use
scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(→P.211)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.544)
Drying documents stacked on each other may cause To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each
uneven colors.
sheet separately.
Color density may be uneven if you use Glossy
Paper, art paper, or Coated Paper.
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose
Highest or High in Print Quality.
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does Load paper of the same type as you have specied
not match the type loaded in the printer.
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Troubleshooting 627
Problems with the printing quality
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs
Cause
The Platen suction is too strong.
Corrective Action
Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest.
(→P.561)
Close the blue Switch on the platen so that it matches
the paper size.
(→P.629)
The Printhead is set too high.
Lower the Printhead.
(→P.551)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
628 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen
If printed documents exhibit the following symptoms, adjust the setting of the blue Switch on the Platen.
• Image edges are blurred
• Image edges are affected by white banding
Important
• Always set the blue Switch on the Platen to the ● side for borderless printing. Printing quality may be
affected if the Switch is incorrectly set.
1.
Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Rolls (→P.125)
• Sheet (→P.155)
2.
Open the Top Cover.
3.
Remove the Cleaning Brush.
4.
Using the back of the Cleaning Brush, move the rst Switch to the side opposite ●.
Troubleshooting 629
Problems with the printing quality
5.
Refer to the following table to conrm the number on the Platen that corresponds to the size
of paper for printing.
Paper Size
Number
6.
Dimensions
2
10"x12" / 8"x10"
254 mm (10 in.)
3
14"x17"
355 mm (14 in.)
4
17-in. Roll (431.8mm) / ANSI C
432 mm (17 in.)
5
JIS B2 / JIS B3
515 mm (20 in.)
6
ISO A1 / ISO A2 / 20"x24"
594 mm (23 in.) / 610 mm (24 in.)
7
ISO A0 / ISO A1
841 mm (33 in.)
8
36"x48" (ARCH E) / 24"x36" (ARCH D)
914 mm (36 in.)
9
JIS B0 / JIS B1
1030 mm (40.5 in.)
10
Poster 42"x60"
1,067 mm (42 in.)
Using the back of the Cleaning Brush, move the Switch to the side opposite ●, corresponding to
the size of the paper for printing.
In this case, note that you will move the switch in the opposite direction from the direction in
step 4.
7.
Close the Top Cover.
630 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
Cause
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.
Corrective Action
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.552)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does Load paper of the same type as you have specied
not match the type loaded in the printer.
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The length of printed images is inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed
Priority.
To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size,
select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer
menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust
Length.
(→P.552)
You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02% increments.
(→P.53)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Documents are printed crooked
Cause
Corrective Action
Skew Skew Check Lv. has been set to Loose or Off. Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv..
Width Detection has been set to Off.
Choose On in Width Detection.
Troubleshooting 631
Problems with the printing quality
Documents are printed in monochrome
Cause
Corrective Action
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
Monochrome, Monochrome (BK ink), or
Monochrome Bitmap is specied in Color Mode.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and
see if they are clogged.
(→P.577)
Line thickness is not uniform
Cause
Corrective Action
In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows
printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.
Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from
Print in the application software’s File menu, and try
printing following the steps below.
1. Clear the option Open Preview When Print Job
Starts on the Main sheet.
2. Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout
sheet.
3. Click the Special Settings button on the Layout
sheet to display the Special Settings dialog box.
Clear the option Fast Graphic Process.
The blue Switch on the platen is open.
Close the blue Switch on the platen so that it matches
the paper size.
(→P.629)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type specied on the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
632 Troubleshooting
Problems with the printing quality
Lines are misaligned
Cause
Corrective Action
The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.544)
(→P.546)
(→P.548)
The type of paper specied in the printer driver does
not match the type loaded in the printer.
Load paper of the same type as you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.118)
(→P.150)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the type of paper in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type
of paper
For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
Troubleshooting 633
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a network
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cause
Corrective Action
The Ethernet cable is not connected
correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.
1. Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct
Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on
connecting the cable, refer to the Setup Guide.
2. Make sure the Link indicator is lit.
The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100
Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.
If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.
• Make sure the hub is on.
• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly.
Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.
• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.
If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.
• Check the communication mode with the hub.
Although the printer normally detects the hub
communication mode and transmission rate automatically
(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings
cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection
method manually, specifying the communication mode in
use.
(→P.635)
634 Troubleshooting
Cannot print over a network
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually
This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
10.
11.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
12.
Press the Online button.
After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK.
The new settings will take effect after the printer restarts.
Troubleshooting 635
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured
correctly.
(→P.444)
(→P.445)
The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not
congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are
congured correctly.
(→P.448)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings
are congured correctly.
(→P.456)
(→P.476)
Cannot print over a NetWare network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured
correctly.
Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid
frame type is selected.
(→P.451)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly.
(→P.468)
The NetWare server and services are not congured Check the following points.
correctly.
1. Make sure the NetWare le server is running.
2. Make sure there is enough free disk space on the
NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may
prevent you from processing large print jobs.
3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that
the print service is congured correctly and the
print queue is available.
4. If data transmission to a printer on another subnet
fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s
network protocol settings.
5. If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify
“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.
636 Troubleshooting
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks
Cause
Corrective Action
The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.
Activate AppleTalk on the printer.
(→P.450)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are
congured correctly.
(→P.473)
(→P.479)
The computer and printer are not on the same
network.
Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if
the printer is on another network behind a router.
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. For information about network settings, ask
your network administrator.
Troubleshooting 637
Installation problems
Installation problems
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly
In Windows, the device interface driver may not be installed correctly in some cases if you connected the
IEEE 1394 cable before installing the printer driver.
If so, reinstall the IEEE 1394 device interface driver and the printer driver as follows.
Important
• This procedure is based on an example for Windows XP. The name of the wizard may be different
in other operating systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to display the System Properties window.
On the Hardware sheet, click Device Manager to display the Device Manager window.
Right-click the Other Devices icon and choose Properties.
On the Driver sheet, click Update Driver to start the Hardware Update Wizard (or the Upgrade
Device Driver Wizard ).
5.
6.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
When the window for choosing the source for driver installation is displayed, select the CD-ROM
drive. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer and follow the instructions
on the screen.
The device and interface driver is installed.
The device is detected, and the New Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware Wizard )
is started.
7.
8.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
When the window for choosing the source for driver installation is displayed, select the printer
driver folder.
Open the CD-ROM drive, navigate to Printer_Driver > WinXP_2K > Driver, and then click OK.
(For Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)
9.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
The printer driver is now installed.
638 Troubleshooting
Installation problems
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.
Removing printer drivers (Windows)
Remove the printer driver as follows.
Note
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must
log on with administrative rights, such as those of the “Administrator” account.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller >
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.
2.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes after the Warning message is displayed.
Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit.
Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)
Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.
1.
2.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.
Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.
Open the OS X folder and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.
3.
4.
In the upper left menu, choose Uninstall, and then click Uninstall.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Troubleshooting 639
HP-GL/2 problems
HP-GL/2 problems
Lines or images are missing in the HP-GL/2 data that
was printed.
Cause
Corrective Action
The memory is full.
Check the size of the data in the print job.
An HP-GL/2 command not supported by this printer
was received.
Check the print job and settings.
The printer has received print data that includes HP
RTL commands when Auto Rotate is On.
Set Auto Rotate to Off before attempting to print
again.
(→P.53)
Lines Are Printed Too Thick or Thin During HP-GL/2
Printing
Cause
Corrective Action
The Line Width setting in the main menu is incorrect. Conrm the selection in Line Width. If ne lines are
printed faint, setting ThickenFineLines to On in the
main menu will print the lines more distinctly.
(→P.53)
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color).
Cause
The Color Mode is incorrect.
Corrective Action
On the printer Control Panel, check the Color Mode
setting.
(→P.53)
However, for optimal Printhead performance, the
printer consumes trace amounts of color ink even
when Monochrome is selected as Color Mode.
Printed Colors in Line Drawings are Inaccurate During
HP-GL/2 Printing
Cause
AdjustFaintLines in the main menu is set to On.
Corrective Action
Selecting Off may help produce the expected results.
However, lines in some colors may appear broken.
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time.
Cause
Corrective Action
Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print. On the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to
300dpi.
(→P.53)
640 Troubleshooting
HP-GL/2 problems
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the
carriage stops moving)
Cause
The printer is analyzing the print job.
Corrective Action
Either wait a while for printing to resume, or on
the printer Control Panel, set Input Resolution to
300dpi.
(→P.53)
Troubleshooting 641
Other problems
Other problems
The printer does not go on
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is unplugged.
Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on
the printer.
The specied voltage is not supplied.
Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.
Use a power source that conforms to the printer
specications.
(→P.79)
642 Troubleshooting
Other problems
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer makes a sound during
operation.
The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.
• There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen
To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by
suction from Vacuum holes under it.
• There is a sound when a different size of paper is used and when
the Carriage goes from side to side
This may happen especially when using B0 or 44-inch paper.
When paper of a different size is used, a valve is automatically
activated to switch the area for paper suction, which may make a
sound. This mechanism prevents vacuum from Vacuum holes where
there is no paper.
In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage
back and forth to ensure optimal ink ow. At this time, the valve
automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make
a sound.
• Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing
There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.
• You suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations
At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will
begin automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.
• You suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation
At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality, the ink is
agitated automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode. Ink
agitation takes about a minute and a half.
The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions.
Note that other operations are not possible while Agitating is
displayed on the control panel.
• After the printer is turned on. (The time for agitation varies
depending on how long the printer has been turned off-between
about a minute and a half to twenty minutes. During agitation,
you can print or do other operations after the printer goes
Online.)
• After data transmission. (After about a minute and a half, the
printer goes Online, and printing operations begin. However,
printing may start later after data reception, depending on the
size of print data.)
• After ink tank replacement. (Ink agitation takes about three
and a half minutes. During agitation, you can print or do other
operations after the printer goes Online.)
In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.
Troubleshooting 643
Other problems
Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge
are not cleared
Cause
The printer has not detected the new Maintenance
Cartridge that was used to replace the old one.
Corrective Action
Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have
just installed and insert it again rmly.
Restart the printer.
The printer consumes a lot of ink
Cause
Corrective Action
Many full-page color images are printed.
In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with
color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not
indicate a problem with the printer.
Head Cleaning B is used often.
Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does
not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the
printer has been moved or stored for a long period
or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we
recommend not performing Head Cleaning B, to the
extent possible.
You have just nished initial installation, when more
ink is consumed to ll the system.
After initial installation or at the rst-time use after
transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink
Tank and Printhead, which may cause the ink level
indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a
problem with the printer.
The printhead nozzles are clogged.
Check for nozzle clogging.
(→P.577)
644 Troubleshooting
Other problems
Ink level detection
Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.
Ink level detection
Ink tanks specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out
during printing, which prevents printer damage. (→P.562)
This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using
rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.
Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.
is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.
Caution
• After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded
Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use
with the printer.
• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and
the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.
Disabling ink level detection
1.
On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking
the message, press the ► button.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.
3.
A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection. After
checking the message, press the ► button.
4.
After checking the message, press the ► button.
Troubleshooting 645
Other problems
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
6.
Check the message and press the ► button.
7.
Check the message and press the ► button.
8.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
9.
A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen. After
checking the message, press the ► button.
10.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.
646 Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
Error Message
Responding to Messages
Responding to Messages
Error Message
Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.648)
Other Messages
These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take
action as necessary.
Note
• Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh).
Error Message 647
Responding to Messages
Error Messages
Error messages
Check the message and take the appropriate action.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch. (→P.667)
Blue platen switch is dirty. (→P.667)
Borderless printng not possible. (→P.660)
Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or shrank. (→P.667)
Cannot adjust band. (→P.666)
Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.666)
Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use. (→P.653)
Cannot print as specied. (→P.665)
Close Ink Tank Cover (→P.662)
End of paper feed. (→P.659)
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.674)
File read error. (→P.671)
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.674)
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range. (→P.673)
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported. (→P.673)
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904) (→P.673)
Hard disk error. (→P.671)
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.674)
Ink insufcient. (→P.662)
No ink left. (→P.662)
Ink tank is empty. (→P.663)
Insert the maintenance cartridge. (→P.670)
Insufcient paper for job (→P.653)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. (→P.671)
Mail box nearly full. (→P.671)
Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.670)
Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.670)
Maximum jobs stored. (→P.672)
Multi-sensor error (→P.675)
No ink tank loaded. (→P.663)
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.670)
No printhead (→P.669)
No Roll Unit. (→P.656)
Not much ink is left. (→P.663)
Paper cutting failed. (→P.659)
Paper jam. (→P.657)
Paper loaded askew. (→P.658)
Paper size not detected. (→P.652)
Papr Type Mismatch (→P.650)
PaprTypeMismatch (→P.650)
Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.675)
PHead needs cleaning. (→P.669)
Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.670)
Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.675)
648 Error Message
Responding to Messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printhead error (→P.669)
Problem with Printhead (→P.669)
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.656)
Rel lever is in wrong position. (→P.659)
Roll feed unit error. (→P.660)
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.654)
Roll printing is selected. (→P.654)
Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) (→P.657)
RollWdthMismatch (→P.651)
Sheet printing is selected. (→P.656)
Sheet removed. (→P.656)
The mail box is full. (→P.671)
The paper is too small. (→P.651)
The roll feed unit is loose. (→P.661)
Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower)) (→P.655)
This paper cannot be used. (→P.653)
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2. (→P.673)
Too many jobs for mail box. (→P.672)
Top cover is open. (→P.674)
Unknown le. (→P.675)
Use another paper. (→P.665)
Wrong ink tank. (→P.663)
Wrong maintenance cartridge. (→P.670)
Wrong printhead. (→P.669)
Other Messages
These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take
action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:
• Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.662)
Error Message 649
Messages regarding paper
Messages regarding paper
Papr Type Mismatch
Cause
You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment
on several sheets, but sheets of different types of
paper were used.
Corrective Action
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same
type of paper.
Lift the Release Lever and load a sheet of the same
type of paper.
(→P.93)
PaprTypeMismatch
Cause
Corrective Action
When the Detect Mismatch menu is set to Pause,
the type of paper loaded does not match the type
specied in the printer driver.
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches
on the printer and in the printer driver.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Either change the type of paper specied in the
printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper
and change the paper type setting on the printer.
(→P.89)
(→P.93)
You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment
on several sheets, but sheets of different types of
paper were used.
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches
on the printer and in the printer driver.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Either change the type of paper specied in the
printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper
and change the paper type setting on the printer.
(→P.89)
(→P.93)
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams
and affect the printing quality.
When the Detect Mismatch menu is set to Warning, You can continue to print, but note that this error may
the type of paper loaded does not match the type
cause problems in the printing results.
specied in the printer driver.
650 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
The paper is too small.
Cause
When the Detect Mismatch menu is set to Pause,
the paper loaded in the printer is smaller than the
size specied in the printer driver.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams
and affect the printing quality.
Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to
match the size loaded in the printer as follows.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper size setting in the printer driver
to the size loaded in the printer and try printing
again.
Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that
matches the size setting in the printer driver as
follows.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Replace the loaded paper to match the paper size
setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
When the Detect Mismatch menu is set to Warning, You can continue to print, but note that this error may
the paper loaded in the printer is smaller than the
cause problems in the printing results.
size specied in the printer driver.
RollWdthMismatch
Cause
The roll width set in Fit Roll Paper Width in the
printer driver does not match the width of the roll
loaded in the printer.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, note that this error may cause paper jams
and affect the printing quality.
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Make sure the roll width selected in the dialog box
displayed when you select Fit Roll Paper Width in
the printer driver matches the width of the roll loaded
in the printer, and then try printing again.
Error Message 651
Messages regarding paper
Paper size not detected.
Cause
Corrective Action
Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has
been loaded.
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1. Lift the Release Lever.
2. Open the Top Cover.
3. Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel
to the right Paper Alignment Line.
4. Lower the Release Lever.
5. Close the Top Cover.
6. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
(→P.118)
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove
the Roll Holder from the printer, push the roll rmly in
until it touches the Roll Holder ange, and reload the
Roll Holder in the printer.
(→P.115)
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Lift the Release Lever.
2. Open the Top Cover.
3. Adjust the right edge of the sheet to make it
parallel to the right Paper Alignment Line and the
trailing edge of the sheet to make it parallel to the
paper alignment line under the Paper Retainer.
4. Lower the Release Lever.
5. Close the Top Cover.
6. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
(→P.150)
652 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Insufcient paper for job
Cause
The printer has received a print job longer than the
amount of roll paper left when ManageRemainRoll
in the printer menu is On and one of the following
settings is selected.
• An option other than Roll Paper (Auto) is selected
in Paper Source in the printer driver.
• During HP-GL/2 printing, GL2 Settings > Paper
Source in the printer menu is set to an option
other than Automatic.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, the roll paper may run out during the
print job and you may not be able to print all of the
document.
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Either change the printer driver Paper Source setting
or the GL2 Settings > Paper Source setting in the
printer menu or replace the roll with a roll that has
enough paper for the print job, and then try printing
again.
(→P.125)
(→P.118)
This paper cannot be used.
Cause
Corrective Action
Paper that is too large for the printer has been loaded. Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct
size.
(→P.109)
Paper that is too small for the printer has been
loaded.
Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct
size.
(→P.109)
Paper has been loaded that is too small to print
the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle
checking.
Lift the Release Lever and load unused paper A4
or larger. More than one sheet may be required
depending on the adjustment.
Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use.
Cause
A printed document remains in the Output Tray
without being cut and a print job was received that
species the other roll.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to load the other roll after cutting
the printed document.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Cut the printed document.
(→P.139)
3. Load the other roll and resend the print job.
(→P.89)
Error Message 653
Messages regarding paper
Roll printing is selected.
Cause
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or
other printer status information on a roll, but no roll
is loaded.
Corrective Action
Load a roll and try printing again.
To print on a sheet instead, hold down the Stop
button for more than a second to cancel printing, load
a sheet, and then print.
(→P.93)
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Cause
A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is
loaded.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to load and print on a roll.
1. Press the OK button and remove the sheet.
(→P.155)
2. Load a new roll.
(→P.118)
The printer now starts printing the print job.
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
654 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))
Lift the release lever and replace the roll.
Cause
Corrective Action
The roll is empty.
Follow these steps to replace the used roll with a new
roll of the same type and size.
1. Lift the Release Lever and remove the roll.
(→P.125)
(→P.129)
2. Load the new roll.
(→P.115)
(→P.118)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
type of paper.
(→P.113)
4. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper length.
(→P.114)
5. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
There is remaining roll paper, but because it could
not be advanced, it could not be detected.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try
printing again.
(→P.211)
Press OK.
Cause
The roll is empty.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to replace the used roll with a new
roll of the same type and size.
1. Press the OK button and remove the roll.
(→P.125)
(→P.129)
2. Load the new roll.
(→P.115)
(→P.118)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
type of paper.
(→P.113)
4. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper length.
(→P.114)
5. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Error Message 655
Messages regarding paper
No Roll Unit.
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer has received a print job that species Roll Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
2 (Lower), but the Roll Unit is not installed.
cancel printing.
1. Turn the printer off and install the Roll Unit.
Connect the Roll Unit Cable rmly and completely.
2. Turn the printer on and resend the print job.
Sheet removed.
Cause
A sheet has come out of the printer during printing.
Corrective Action
1. Lift the Release Lever and remove the paper.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Sheet printing is selected.
Cause
Corrective Action
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other Load a sheet and try printing again.
printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet
To print on a roll instead, hold down the Stop button
is loaded.
for more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll,
and then print.
(→P.89)
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Cause
A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a
roll is loaded.
656 Error Message
Corrective Action
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Remove the roll and load a sheet of the type and size
of paper you have specied in the printer driver.
(→P.125)
(→P.93)
Messages regarding paper
Paper jam.
Lift the release lever.
Cause
A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.
Corrective Action
1. Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed
paper.
(→P.131)
(→P.156)
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.
Cause
A paper jam occurred when advancing the paper.
Corrective Action
1. Rewind paper on the Roll Holder manually, all the
way, and then press the OK button.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))
Lift the release lever.
Cause
A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.
Corrective Action
1. Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed
paper.
(→P.131)
(→P.156)
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.
Cause
A paper jam occurred when advancing the paper.
Corrective Action
1. Rewind paper on the Roll Holder manually, all the
way, and then press the OK button.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
Error Message 657
Messages regarding paper
Paper loaded askew.
Cause
Paper is loaded askew.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to reload the roll.
1. Lift the Release Lever.
2. Open the Top Cover.
3. Adjust the right edge of the roll to make it parallel
to the right Paper Alignment Line.
4. Lower the Release Lever.
5. Close the Top Cover.
(→P.118)
If this error recurs after you reload the roll, remove
the Roll Holder from the printer, push the roll rmly in
until it touches the Roll Holder ange, and reload the
Roll Holder in the printer.
(→P.115)
Follow these step to reload a sheet.
1. Lift the Release Lever.
2. Open the Top Cover.
3. Adjust the right edge of the sheet to make it
parallel to the right Paper Alignment Line and the
trailing edge of the sheet to make it parallel to the
paper alignment line under the Paper Retainer.
4. Lower the Release Lever.
5. Close the Top Cover.
(→P.150)
Note
• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off
or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams because
paper may be askew when it is printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of
the next document when it is printed.
658 Error Message
Messages regarding paper
Paper cutting failed.
Cause
There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide.
Corrective Action
1. Lift the Release Lever and remove the paper.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
There is a foreign object by the Output Tray,
obstructing the Cutter Unit.
1. Lift the Top Cover and remove the foreign object.
2. If Not nished printing. Finish printing
remaining jobs? is shown on the Display Screen,
press the OK button.
Printing will resume, starting from the page on
which the error occurred.
You are not using the printer under the recommended Use the printer only where the recommended
environmental conditions for the paper.
environmental conditions for the paper are met.
Note that various environmental conditions are
recommended for various types of paper. For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper, see the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
You are using paper that is not compatible with
automatic cutting.
Specify Manual as the cutting method and cut the
roll manually.
(→P.139)
For information about paper that is compatible with
automatic cutting, see the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage out of the
way, away from the paper.
If the Cutter is out, move the Cutter to the right side
(away from the paper) and remove the jammed paper.
(→P.131)
If the paper cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit,
specify Manual as the roll cutting method and cut
the roll manually.
(→P.139)
In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
End of paper feed.
Cause
You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel
and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.
Corrective Action
Release the ▲ button.
Rel lever is in wrong position.
Cause
The Release Lever is up.
Corrective Action
Lower the Release Lever.
If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait
a while before restoring power.
Error Message 659
Messages regarding paper
Borderless printng not possible.
Lift release lever and reload the paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
Because paper expands or contracts depending on Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
the environment of use, it may become narrower or cancel printing.
wider than the supported width for borderless printing. Use each type of paper only where the recommended
environmental conditions are met. For details on
environmental conditions for various paper, see the
Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
The paper is loaded askew.
Lift the Release Lever and straighten the paper so
that the edge of the paper is in the width of the ink
groove for borderless printing.
Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the
Roll Holder.
(→P.115)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
Check supported paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The print job received species a type or width of
paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.
Follow these steps to change the settings of the print
job to enable borderless printing.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer
is selected and try printing again.
For information on types of paper compatible with
borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide.
(→P.104)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
The loaded paper is not compatible with borderless
printing.
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
Roll feed unit error.
Cause
There is a problem with the Roll Unit.
660 Error Message
Corrective Action
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power. If the message is
displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for
assistance.
Messages regarding paper
The roll feed unit is loose.
Cause
The Roll Unit is detached from the printer.
Corrective Action
Push the Roll Unit rmly all the way in.
Error Message 661
Messages regarding ink
Messages regarding ink
Ink insufcient.
Cause
The ink level is low, so you cannot print, clean the
Printhead, or do other operations that require ink.
Corrective Action
Replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank.
(→P.563)
No ink left.
Cause
There is no ink left.
Corrective Action
Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
(→P.563)
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.
Cause
Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use
rell ink tanks.
Corrective Action
The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the
section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate
action. (→P.645)
Close Ink Tank Cover
Cause
The Ink Tank Cover is open.
662 Error Message
Corrective Action
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
Messages regarding ink
Ink tank is empty.
Cause
There is no ink left in an ink tank.
Corrective Action
Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
(→P.563)
Not much ink is left.
Cause
Not much ink is left.
Corrective Action
Prepare a new Ink Tank.
We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink
Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or
high-quantity jobs.
No ink tank loaded.
Cause
Corrective Action
There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the
printer.
Load or reload the Ink Tank.
(→P.563)
There is a problem with the Ink Tank.
Replace it with a new Ink Tank.
(→P.563)
Wrong ink tank.
Cause
The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.
Corrective Action
Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.
(→P.563)
Error Message 663
Messages regarding ink
The display screen indicates Agitating
Cause
Ink agitation is in progress.
664 Error Message
Corrective Action
The time for agitation varies depending on how long
the printer has been turned off. (Between about
a minute and a half to twenty minutes.) During
agitation, you can print or do other operations after
the printer goes Online.
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Use another paper.
Cause
The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted
when highly transparent lm is loaded.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button to clear the error.
We recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.544)
Press the Online button to clear the error, and then
adjust the feed amount manually.
(→P.556)
Cannot print as specied.
Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or
larger.
Cause
The loaded paper is too small.
Corrective Action
Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.
Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.
Cause
The loaded paper is too small.
Corrective Action
Load a roll 10 inches wide or larger.
Error Message 665
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Execute Auto Band Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.577)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.578)
4. Execute Auto Band Adj. again.
(→P.554)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Press the Online button to clear the error, and then
for automatic feed amount adjustment.
adjust the feed amount manually.
(→P.556)
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Execute Auto Head Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.577)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.578)
4. Execute Auto Head Adj. again.
(→P.544)
The Printhead cannot be aligned; highly transparent
lm is loaded.
Press the Online button to clear the error.
We recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.544)
The Printhead is installed crooked.
Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute
Auto Head Adj. again.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Use Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of
inclination of the Printhead.
(→P.548)
3. Execute Auto Head Adj. again.
(→P.544)
666 Error Message
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or
shrank.
Cause
Corrective Action
The loaded roll has expanded or contracted due to
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
environmental conditions, making it wider or narrower cancel printing.
than the supported width for borderless printing.
Use each type of paper only where the recommended
environmental conditions are met. For details on
environmental conditions for various paper, see the
Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
Before borderless printing, move the blue platen switch.
Cause
Corrective Action
The blue Switch on the platen was set to the side
Before borderless printing, set the blue Switch on the
opposite ● when a borderless print job was received. platen to the ● side.
(→P.629)
Blue platen switch is dirty.
Cause
The blue Switch on the platen is dirty.
Corrective Action
Open the Top Cover and clean the blue Switch on
the platen.
(→P.597)
Error Message 667
Messages regarding printheads
Messages regarding printheads
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Execute Auto Head Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.577)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.578)
4. Execute Auto Head Adj. again.
(→P.544)
The Printhead cannot be aligned; highly transparent
lm is loaded.
Press the Online button to clear the error.
We recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.544)
The Printhead is installed crooked.
Straighten the Printhead as follows, and then execute
Auto Head Adj. again.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Use Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of
inclination of the Printhead.
(→P.548)
3. Execute Auto Head Adj. again.
(→P.544)
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Execute Auto Band Adj. again, as follows.
1. Press the Online button to clear the error.
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.577)
3. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.578)
4. Execute Auto Band Adj. again.
(→P.554)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Press the Online button to clear the error, and then
for automatic feed amount adjustment.
adjust the feed amount manually.
(→P.556)
668 Error Message
Messages regarding printheads
PHead needs cleaning.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Press the Online button to resume printing.
Follow these steps to clean the Printhead.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Printhead cleaning options.
(→P.578)
If the message is still displayed after you execute
Head Cleaning B once or twice, contact your Canon
dealer for assistance.
Wrong printhead.
Cause
An incompatible Printhead has been installed.
Corrective Action
Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with
a new one.
(→P.579)
Problem with Printhead
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.
Corrective Action
If printing is faint, clean the Printhead.
(→P.578)
Printhead error
Cause
There is a problem with the Printhead.
Corrective Action
Open the Top Cover and replace the Printhead with
a new one.
(→P.579)
No printhead
Cause
No Printhead is installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Printhead.
(→P.579)
Error Message 669
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Insert the maintenance cartridge.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.586)
Wrong maintenance cartridge.
Cause
A Maintenance Cartridge for a different model of
printer is installed.
Corrective Action
Replace it with the Maintenance Cartridge for your
particular model.
Prepare for maint cart replacement.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.
Corrective Action
You can continue to print, but prepare a new
Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for
replacement is displayed.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough
ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.586)
Maintenance cartridge full.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is full.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
(→P.586)
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Cause
Corrective Action
An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has
been installed.
Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for
use with the printer.
(→P.586)
670 Error Message
Messages regarding the hard disk
Messages regarding the hard disk
Hard disk error.
Cause
The format of the printer’s hard disk is invalid.
Corrective Action
Press the OK button to start reformatting the
hard disk. When formatting is nished, the printer
automatically restarts. (Formatting will erase all data
on the hard disk.)
File read error.
Cause
Files on the printer’s hard disk have become
corrupted.
Corrective Action
Restart the printer. Only the corrupted les will be
deleted, and the printer will restart.
The mail box is full.
Cause
There is no more space on the printer’s hard disk.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue.
(→P.490)
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes (box
numbers in the range 01-29).
(→P.534)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.
Cause
Corrective Action
No more space is available on the printer’s hard disk, After printing, this message is cleared.
so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print
jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)
Mail box nearly full.
Cause
Corrective Action
The free hard disk space left for personal boxes in the Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
printer’s hard disk does not have 1 GB, combined.
(→P.534)
Error Message 671
Messages regarding the hard disk
Maximum jobs stored.
Cause
100 jobs are stored in the personal box.
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes.
(→P.534)
Too many jobs for mail box.
Cause
Saved jobs exceed the personal box capacity.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue.
(→P.490)
Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes (box
numbers in the range 01-29).
(→P.534)
672 Error Message
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
Messages regarding HP-GL/2
This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.
Cause
The printer has received a HP-GL/2 print job that
cannot be printed on the paper that has been
advanced.
Corrective Action
Follow these steps to replace the type of paper in
the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Replace the paper with a type compatible with
HP-GL/2. For details on paper compatible with
HP-GL/2, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.104)
Press the Online button to resume printing. However,
note that this error may cause paper jams and affect
the printing quality.
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or
0904)
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer memory became full while processing the Check the print job and the printing results.
job received.
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.
Cause
A parameter specied in a HP-GL/2 command is out
of the supported range.
Corrective Action
Check the print job.
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.
Cause
The printer has received an unsupported HP-GL/2
command.
Corrective Action
Check the print job.
Error Message 673
Other Messages
Other Messages
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
Cause
There is a problem with the print job.
Corrective Action
Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.
It is also possible to continue printing in this state.
However, you may not be able to obtain the desired
printing results.
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
Cause
An error requiring service may have occurred.
Corrective Action
Write down the error code and message, turn off the
printer, and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or
number)
Cause
Corrective Action
The last portion of roll paper was used during a
print job. The paper was not advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Turn off the printer and remove the roll from the
printer before restoring power.
Fastening tape or the Belt Stopper has not been
removed inside the Top Cover.
Turn off the printer, open the Top Cover and remove
the tape or the Belt Stopper before restoring power.
An error requiring service may have occurred.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is displayed again, write down the
error code and message, turn off the printer, and
contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Top cover is open.
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.
Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects,
and close the Top Cover again.
If the error occurs again, close the Top Cover, turn off
the printer, and wait a while before restoring power.
674 Error Message
Other Messages
Prepare for parts replacement.
Cause
It is almost time to replace consumables for which
service is required.
Corrective Action
You can continue to use the printer for some time
until Parts replacement time has passed. will be
displayed.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Parts replacement time has passed.
Cause
It is past the recommended time to replace
consumables for which service is required.
Corrective Action
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Unknown le.
Cause
Corrective Action
Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as
paper information) is in the wrong format.
Check the data. Turn off the printer and wait a while
before restoring power, and then resend the data.
You have uploaded rmware for a different model.
Check the rmware version. Turn off the printer and
wait a while before restoring power, and then resend
the rmware.
If the message is displayed again, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
Multi-sensor error
Cause
Corrective Action
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may
be impaired.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is displayed again, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
No Roll Unit.
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer has received a print job that species Roll Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
2 (Lower), but the Roll Unit is not installed.
cancel printing.
1. Turn the printer off and install the Roll Unit.
Connect the Roll Unit Cable rmly and completely.
2. Turn the printer on and resend the print job.
Error Message 675
676
Index
Index
A
Print Image with Actual Size......................259, 280
About This User Manual..............................................1
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Mac OS X)......................................................262, 283
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X).........................................425
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Windows).......................................................260, 281
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)...........................................381
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width................................................................272
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)........................383
Borderless Printing............................................272
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X).....................438
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width..............................273
Adjusting Images.....................................................201
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................................276
Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length)....................559
Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)..........548
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver..................201
Color Adjustment...............................................202
Color Mode........................................................201
Borderless Printing Method...............................272
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Windows)..............................................274
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................................269
Matching............................................................203
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Windows).......................................267
Adjusting the feed amount.......................................552
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.....265
Adjusting the Printhead...........................................543
Borderless Printing............................................265
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth)...561
Borderless Printing Method...............................265
Adjustments for Better Print Quality........................543
Fit Paper Size....................................................266
An error message is shown on the Display
Screen.....................................................................620
Borderless printng not possible...............................660
Check supported paper.....................................660
Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls............................ 115
Auto Band Adjustment (Auto Band Adj.)..................554
Automatic Roll Switching.........................................146
Automatic Straightening of Lines and Colors
(Auto Head Adj.)......................................................544
B
Lift release lever and reload the paper..............660
Borderless printng not possible. Paper stretched or
shrank......................................................................667
C
Canceling print jobs...................................................99
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X......................102
Back..........................................................................15
Banding Adjustment During Printing
(Fine Band Adj.).......................................................558
Banding in different colors occurs...........................626
Basic Environmental Performance............................84
Packaging materials............................................84
Printer..................................................................84
Canceling print jobs from the Control Panel......103
Canceling print jobs from the printer driver or
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor..........................102
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel............99
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows........................100
Canceling print jobs from the Control Panel......101
Basic Printing Workflow.............................................86
Canceling print jobs in the printer window or
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.......................100
Before borderless printing, move the blue platen
switch......................................................................667
Cannot adjust band.........................................666, 668
Blue platen switch is dirty. ......................................667
Borderless Printing..................................................265
Borderless Printing at Actual Size...................258, 279
Cannot adjust printhead..................................666, 668
Cannot connect the printer to the network..............634
Cannot Load Sheets................................................618
Cannot print as selected. Another roll is in use.......653
Borderless Printing....................................258, 279
Borderless Printing Method.......................258, 279
Index 677
Index
Cannot print as specified.........................................665
Cleaning the Printhead....................................578, 600
Lift the release lever and replace paper with
A4/LTR (vertical) or larger.................................665
Cleaning the Printhead..............................578, 600
Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll...............................................665
Cannot print over a NetWare network.....................636
Cannot print over a network....................................634
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network........................636
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks...637
Clearing a Jammed Sheet...............................156, 613
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper..........................131, 610
Close Ink Tank Cover..............................................662
Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)..............391
Object Adjustment dialog box............................392
Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome
(Windows)...............................................................395
Carriage.....................................................................18
Object Adjustment dialog box............................396
Centering originals..................................................324
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)..................432
Checking for Nozzle Clogging.................................577
Color Adjustment pane: color............................432
Checking Images Before Printing............................347
Matching pane...................................................433
Checking Ink Tank Levels........................................574
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)......434
Checking Instructions During Printer Operations......76
Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome...............434
How to view instructions......................................76
Colors in printed images are uneven.......................627
Viewing instructions for loading or removing
rolls......................................................................77
Configuring NetWare Network Settings...................468
Viewing instructions for loading or removing
sheets..................................................................77
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks
(Macintosh)..............................................................473
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space.......................539
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................541
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............540
Using RemoteUI................................................540
Using the Control Panel....................................539
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before
Printing....................................................................347
Open Preview When Print Job Starts
(Windows).........................................................347
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually.....635
Activating AppleTalk on the printer....................473
Configuring the destination (Mac OS X)............474
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................479
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................476
Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)...........476
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer...............443
Preview (Macintosh)..........................................348
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands..............................................................446
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Mac OS X)......................................................352, 423
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility.................................417, 444, 470
Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing
(Windows).......................................................349, 376
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel.......................................................................445
imagePROGRAF Preview.........................350, 377
PageComposer.........................................351, 378
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Macintosh)..............................................................471
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge
Capacity..................................................................594
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Windows)...............................................................456
Choosing a Paper for Printing.................................220
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network
Settings...........................................................450, 472
If the paper type is not listed for selection.........220
Media type.........................................................220
Choosing Paper for Printing....................................220
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Mac OS X)............................................217
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network
Settings...........................................................451, 459
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings448
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X).....................421
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Windows).............................................215
Checking a preview of the settings....................421
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover................................597
Confirming Print Settings (Windows).......................374
Cleaning the Printer.................................................596
Checking a preview of the settings....................374
Cleaning the Printer Exterior...................................596
Checking a print preview...................................375
678 Index
Checking a print preview...................................422
Index
Conserving roll paper..............................................335
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins.........................................341
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper)..............................................341
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)......................344
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).......................342
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees...................................................................335
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)......335
E
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors
Occur.......................................................................454
End of paper feed....................................................659
Enhanced Printing Options......................................201
Erasing Data on the Printer's Hard Disk..................542
ERROR Exxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................674
Error Message.........................................................647
Error Messages.......................................................648
Error messages.................................................648
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Mac OS X)...............................................338
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Windows).................................................336
Control Panel.......................................................21, 23
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing..............................366
Automatic Cutting..............................................366
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)..........368
Other Messages................................................649
F
Favorites Sheet (Windows).....................................404
Feeding Roll Paper Manually..................................135
File read error..........................................................671
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)............367
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Mac OS X)..............................................................208
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper
Automatically...........................................................143
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Windows)...............................................................205
D
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Line Drawings (Mac OS X)......................................184
Deleting Saved Jobs...............................................534
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................538
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............537
Using RemoteUI................................................535
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Line Drawings (Windows)........................................182
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X).................................................171
Using the Control Panel....................................534
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows)...................................................169
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)...........................408
Frequently Asked Questions...................................607
Device Setup Utility.................................................415
Front..........................................................................13
Digital Photo Front-Access...................................... 411
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs..............................503
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................507
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................506
Using RemoteUI................................................504
Using the Control Panel....................................503
Displaying Details of Saved Jobs............................522
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................526
G
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)...................674
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing.................................................... 211
Advanced Settings............................................ 211
Color settings....................................................213
Enhancing printing quality.................................214
Print Priority....................................................... 211
Print Quality.......................................................212
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................524
GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range............673
Using RemoteUI................................................522
GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full.
(xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904)..................................673
Do Not Save Print Jobs in the Common Box..........489
GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.........673
Documents are printed crooked..............................631
Documents are printed in monochrome..................632
Index 679
Index
H
L
Handling Paper........................................................104
Layout Sheet (Windows).........................................400
Handling rolls........................................................... 112
Line thickness is not uniform...................................632
Handling sheets for paper feed slots.......................148
Lines are misaligned...............................................633
Hard Disk.................................................................480
Hard disk error.........................................................671
Lines Are Printed Too Thick or Thin During HP-GL/2
Printing....................................................................640
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................674
Lines or images are missing in the HP-GL/2 data
that was printed.......................................................640
How to use this manual...............................................1
Loading and Printing on Rolls...................................89
HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome
(or color)..................................................................640
Loading and Printing on Sheets................................93
HP-GL/2 Printing.....................................................190
Loading rolls in the Roll 1 (Upper) holder.......... 118
HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time.........................640
Loading rolls in the Roll 2 (Lower) holder..........122
HP-GL/2 problems...................................................640
Loading Sheets in the Printer..................................150
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing.....................5
Printing a group of individual topics in the
manual...................................................................7
Printing a group of topics in the manual................5
Printing selected topics.......................................10
I
Loading Rolls in the Printer..................................... 118
M
Mac OS X Software.................................................418
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data........671
Mail box nearly full...................................................671
Main Menu Operations..............................................36
Accessing menus................................................37
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board....................78
Executing menu commands................................39
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound.....................643
Specifying menu items........................................38
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding
Occurs.....................................................................628
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.....................415
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh).............440
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)...........410
Initializing the Network Settings..............................455
Ink insufficient..........................................................662
Ink level detection....................................................645
Disabling ink level detection..............................645
Ink level detection..............................................645
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)..............................................19
Ink tank is empty......................................................663
Ink Tanks.................................................................562
Insert the maintenance cartridge.............................670
Installation problems...............................................638
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility................................................................416, 469
Insufficient paper for job..........................................653
Introduction..................................................................1
K
Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left.....136
Specifying numerical values................................39
Main Menu Settings...................................................53
Adjust Printer.......................................................60
GL2 Settings........................................................58
Information..........................................................65
Interface Setup....................................................61
Job Management.................................................57
Maintenance........................................................62
Paper Details.......................................................55
Paper Menu.........................................................54
System Setup......................................................63
Main Menu Settings (During Printing).......................66
Information..........................................................66
Main Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................426
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............427
Configuration using Easy Settings....................426
Main Sheet (Windows)............................................385
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............386
Configuration using Easy Settings....................385
Maintenance............................................................562
Maintenance Cartridge............................................585
Maintenance cartridge full.......................................670
Maintenance cartridge problem...............................670
680 Index
Index
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation...............................................................356
N
Mirror.................................................................356
Naming Personal Boxes..........................................498
Orientation.........................................................356
Rotate 180 degrees...........................................356
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................502
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)...........................................359
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................500
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows).............................................357
Using RemoteUI................................................498
Network Environment..............................................441
Managing Queued Jobs (Deleting or Preempting
Other Jobs)..............................................................490
Network Environment........................................442
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)........................................................492
Network Setting.......................................................441
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................492
System requirements........................................441
Network Setting (Mac OS X)...................................471
Network Setting (Windows).....................................456
Using RemoteUI................................................491
No ink left................................................................662
Using the Control Panel....................................491
No ink tank loaded...................................................663
Manual Band Adjustment (Manual Band Adj)..........556
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................670
Manual Straightening of Lines and Colors
(Manual Head Adj)...................................................546
No printhead............................................................669
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for
Printing....................................................................153
Not much ink is left..................................................663
Matching Sheet (Windows).....................................393
Driver Matching Mode.......................................393
ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host
ICM Mode..........................................................394
No Roll Unit.....................................................656, 675
O
Optional accessories.................................................78
Other Maintenance..................................................601
Maximum jobs stored..............................................672
Other Messages......................................................674
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)....430
Other problems........................................................642
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)......389
Other useful settings...............................................353
Menu Structure..........................................................40
Output Stacker........................................................158
Main Menu...........................................................40
Main menu during printing...................................52
P
Submenus...........................................................51
Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)......................402
Messages advising to check the maintenance
cartridge are not cleared.........................................644
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)................................435
Messages regarding HP-GL/2.................................673
Messages regarding ink..........................................662
Messages regarding paper......................................650
Messages regarding printheads..............................668
Messages regarding printing or adjusment.............665
Page Setup Sheet (Windows).................................397
Paper.......................................................................104
Paper cutting failed. . ..............................................659
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Mac OS X)..............................................................429
Messages regarding the hard disk..........................671
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Windows)...............................................................388
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge.....670
Paper is not cut.......................................................618
Moving Saved Jobs.................................................516
Paper is not cut straight...........................................618
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................521
Paper jam................................................................657
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................519
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press
OK.....................................................................657
Using RemoteUI................................................516
Paper loaded askew................................................658
Multi-sensor error....................................................675
Paper rubs against the printhead............................622
Lift the release lever..........................................657
Paper size not detected...........................................652
Index 681
Index
Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows).............399
Printing does not start.............................................619
Paper Sizes.............................................................109
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER......................................196, 246
Rolls..................................................................109
Sheets............................................................... 110
Papr Type Mismatch................................................650
PaprTypeMismatch..................................................650
Parts replacement time has passed........................675
PHead needs cleaning............................................669
PosterArtist..............................................................412
Prepare for maint cart replacement.........................670
Prepare for parts replacement.................................675
Preparing to Transfer the Printer.............................601
Print Area...................................................................85
Rolls....................................................................85
Sheets.................................................................85
Printed colors are inaccurate...................................625
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)..................199, 249
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER.........................................200, 250
Registering a hot folder on your
computer...................................................199, 249
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement .............................................200, 250
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows)....................196, 247
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER. .......................................197, 248
Registering a hot folder on your
computer...................................................197, 247
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement..............................................198, 248
Printed Colors in Line Drawings are Inaccurate
During HP-GL/2 Printing..........................................640
Printing enlargements or reductions........................228
Printer Driver...................................................370, 418
Printing in Mac OS X.................................................97
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X).........................418
Printing from the application software.................97
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)...........................370
Registering the printer.........................................97
Printer Hard Disk Operations..................................480
Printing in Windows...................................................96
Printer Menu Operations...........................................34
Printing is faint.........................................................621
Main menu operations during printing.................34
Printing Large Posters (Windows)...........................322
Main menu operations when no print job is in
progress..............................................................34
Printing Line Drawings and Text..............................174
Submenu operations...........................................35
Printer Modes............................................................27
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel........30
Mode transition....................................................28
Modes..................................................................27
Offline, and state of the Control Panel................29
Online, and state of the Control Panel................29
Submenu mode, and state of the Control
Panel...................................................................31
Printer Parts..............................................................13
Easy Settings....................................................174
Print Target........................................................174
Print targets for line drawings and text..............174
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)..........178
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)............176
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other........304
Free Layout (Windows).....................................304
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh).......305
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Mac OS X)..............................................................308
Printer Specifications.................................................79
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Windows)...............................................................306
Printhead.................................................................576
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously......................310
Printhead error........................................................669
Roll paper (banner)...........................................310
Printheads...............................................................576
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Mac OS X)..............................................................313
Printing a List of Saved Jobs...................................508
Printing at full size...................................................251
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)..............................255
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Windows)............................................................... 311
Printing at Full Size (Windows)...............................253
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet...........................315
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes.....286
Page Layout......................................................315
Printing CAD Drawings............................................174
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X).......318
Printing CAD Drawings in Monochrome..................181
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows).........316
682 Index
Index
Printing Office Documents.......................................191
Easy Settings....................................................191
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing)...........................................286
Print Target........................................................191
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................287
Print targets for office documents......................191
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X).........................293
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)...................194
Register a Custom Page Size...........................294
Printing Office Documents (Windows).....................192
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes...................297
Registering non-standard paper size in the
printer driver......................................................297
Printing the banner............................................295
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Windows)..........................288
Creating the banner in the application...............289
Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary
use.....................................................................297
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Mac OS X)..............................................................302
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Windows)...............................................................298
Printing the banner............................................290
Registering a Custom Paper Size.....................288
Printing With Watermarks........................................353
Watermark.........................................................353
Printing by using Custom Paper Size................300
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and
so on (Windows)......................................................354
Printing by using Custom Size..........................298
Printmonitor.............................................................440
Printing on Oversized Paper...................................251
Problem with Printhead...........................................669
Oversize............................................................251
Problems Regarding Paper.....................................610
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets..................86
Problems with the printing quality............................621
Roll printing.........................................................86
Problems with the printing quality caused by the
type of paper...........................................................633
Sheet printing......................................................88
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls.......................324
Print Centered...................................................324
R
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)...327
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls...........................144
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows).....325
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded......656
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets....................330
Rel lever is in wrong position...................................659
Print Centered...................................................330
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly
detected...................................................................662
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Mac OS X)..............................................................333
Removing Installed Printer Drivers..........................639
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Windows)...............................................................331
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
(Windows).........................................................639
Printing Photos and Images....................................161
Easy Settings....................................................161
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................639
Print Target........................................................161
Removing printer drivers (Windows).................639
Print targets for photos and images..................161
Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh)...................................639
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)................165
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)..................163
Printing Photos in Monochrome..............................168
Printing Photos in Monochrome........................168
Printing Posters in Sections....................................321
Removing Sheets....................................................155
Removing the Roll from the Printer.........................125
Removing rolls from the Roll 1 (Upper)
position..............................................................125
Page Layout......................................................321
Removing rolls from the Roll 2 (Lower)
position..............................................................127
Printing procedure.....................................................86
Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls......................129
Printing Saved Jobs................................................509
Renaming Saved Jobs............................................527
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................514
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................532
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............512
Using RemoteUI................................................510
Using the Control Panel....................................509
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................530
Using RemoteUI................................................527
Index 683
Index
Replacing Ink Tanks................................................563
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.......654
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement......564
Roll printing is selected...........................................654
Compatible ink tanks.........................................563
Roll x is empty. (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))...........655
How to replace an Ink Tank...............................563
Lift the release lever and replace the roll..........655
Load the ink tank (330 ml).................................569
Press OK...........................................................655
Load the ink tank (700 ml).................................571
Roll x jam (x is 1 (Upper) or 2 (Lower))...................657
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank
replacement.......................................................564
Lift the release lever..........................................657
Precautions when handling ink tanks................563
Manually rewind the roll all the way and press
OK.....................................................................657
Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml)..........................565
RollWdthMismatch..................................................651
Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml)..........................567
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.....................586
S
Compatible maintenance cartridges..................586
Saved Print Jobs.....................................................482
Precautions when handling the Maintenance
Cartridge............................................................586
Format of saved print jobs.................................482
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge...............586
Replacing the Shaft Cleaner.............................590
Replacing the Printhead..........................................579
Compatible printheads......................................579
Storage destination...........................................483
Saving Print Jobs....................................................485
Using the printer driver (Mac OS)......................488
Using the printer driver (Windows)....................486
Precautions when handling the Printhead.........579
Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Other than the
Printer Driver...........................................................484
Replacing the Printhead....................................580
Specifying Output Method.................................484
When to replace the Printhead..........................579
Specifying Save and Print.................................484
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......240
Searching Topics.........................................................3
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................240
Scaling...............................................................240
Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method
(Feed Priority)..........................................................553
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Mac OS X)..............................................................243
Selecting the Paper Source............................. 112, 148
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Windows)...............................................................241
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)....................149, 222
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width...................234
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................234
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................234
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Mac OS X)..............................................................237
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Windows)...............................................................235
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size............228
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................228
Fit Paper Size....................................................228
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Mac OS X)..............................................................231
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Windows)...............................................................229
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)....................... 113, 221
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes...................493
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Mac OS)...........................................................497
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................495
Using RemoteUI................................................493
Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen.....................629
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)............409
Sharing the Printer in Windows...............................457
Sheet printing is selected........................................656
Sheet removed........................................................656
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)..................403
Specifications............................................................79
Hard Disk.............................................................83
Responding to Messages........................................647
Ink........................................................................81
Error Message...................................................647
Interface..............................................................80
Other Messages................................................647
Options................................................................83
Roll feed unit error...................................................660
Paper...................................................................82
Roll Holder Set..................................................78, 145
Printer..................................................................79
Roll Paper Cannot be Inserted into the Paper Feed
Slot..........................................................................618
Printing performance...........................................80
684 Index
Index
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings........187
Color Compatibility............................................187
T
Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings
(Windows)...............................................................188
The back side of the paper is dirty..........................624
Specifying NetWare Print Services..........................463
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not
light up.....................................................................619
Choosing the type of print services...................463
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the
print server........................................................464
The contrast becomes uneven during printing........631
The display screen indicates Agitating....................664
Specifying NetWare Protocols.................................466
The display screen indicates the system is filling
with ink....................................................................619
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver.....................223
The edges of the paper are dirty.............................623
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Mac OS X)......................................................226, 419
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed
Correctly..................................................................638
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Windows).......................................................224, 372
The length of printed images is inaccurate..............631
Specifying Printer-Related Information....................453
The paper is too small.............................................651
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls..................139
The printer consumes a lot of ink............................644
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)..........140
The printer does not go on......................................642
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut
using the Cutter Unit ).......................................141
The printer does not respond even if print jobs are
sent..........................................................................619
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your
specified position)..............................................142
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper................620
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls..................137
The mail box is full. . ...............................................671
The printer stops during a print job..........................620
Mac OS X..........................................................138
The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job
(the carriage stops moving).............................620, 641
Windows............................................................137
The roll feed unit is loose. ......................................661
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll).......................... 114
The surface of the paper is dirty..............................624
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type........................461
This paper cannot be used......................................653
Specifying the Frame Type Using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility...............461
This type of paper is not compatible with
HP-GL/2. ................................................................673
Specifying the Frame Type Using the Printer
Control Panel.....................................................462
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet.........................304
Status Monitor.........................................................410
Status Print................................................................69
Too many jobs for mail box......................................672
Top Cover (Inside).....................................................16
Top cover is open....................................................674
Checking the information in the Status Print
report...................................................................69
Troubleshooting.......................................................607
Printing Status Print reports................................69
Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images
(Head Height)..........................................................551
Submenu Display......................................................67
HP-GL/2 setting information................................68
Troubleshooting When Paper Jams are not
Found......................................................................615
Information on the loaded paper.........................67
Turning the Printer On and Off..................................25
Printer information...............................................68
Turning the printer off..........................................26
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and
ink levels..............................................................67
Turning the printer on..........................................25
Support Pane (Mac OS X).......................................439
Types of Paper........................................................104
Support Sheet (Windows).......................................407
Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from
imagePROGRAF Support Information..............105
Switching Modes.......................................................32
Updating Paper Information..............................107
Switching the Printer Online/Offline.....................32
Switching to Menu Mode.....................................33
Index 685
Index
U
V
Unknown file............................................................675
Updating the Firmware............................................606
Confirming the firmware version........................606
Updating the Firmware......................................606
Use another paper...................................................665
Using Favorites.......................................................362
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)..............................................................431
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)...............................................................390
W
Favorites............................................................362
Wheeled Output Stacker...................................20, 158
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)............................365, 424
When to Replace Ink Tanks.....................................575
Using Favorites (Windows).............................363, 379
Before print jobs and maintenance that
consume a lot of ink..........................................575
Printing using the favorite..........................364, 380
Registering a favorite................................363, 379
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals................412
If a message for checking the ink is shown on
the Display Screen............................................575
Edit Using PosterArtist......................................412
If a message for ink replacement is shown on
the Display Screen............................................575
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
(Windows)...............................................................413
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.........595
Using RemoteUI......................................................447
Using the Printer With a Color imageRUNNER.......196
If a message for checking the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen........595
Using the Wheeled Output Stacker.........................159
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge
replacement is shown on the Display Screen...595
Positioning the Wheeled Output Stacker by the
printer................................................................159
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity is depleted...........................................595
Removing the Wheeled Output Stacker from the
printer................................................................160
Windows Software...................................................370
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)..........................................437
Wrong ink tank.........................................................663
Utility Sheet (Windows)...........................................406
Wrong maintenance cartridge. ...............................670
Working With Various Print Jobs.............................161
Wrong printhead......................................................669
686 Index
©CANON INC. 2008